]> git.ipfire.org Git - thirdparty/binutils-gdb.git/blame - ld/ld.texinfo
[x86] Resolve non-PIC undefweak symbols in executable
[thirdparty/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texinfo
CommitLineData
252b5132
RH
1\input texinfo
2@setfilename ld.info
6f2750fe 3@c Copyright (C) 1991-2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 4@syncodeindex ky cp
dff70155 5@c man begin INCLUDE
252b5132
RH
6@include configdoc.texi
7@c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
c428fa83 8@include bfdver.texi
dff70155 9@c man end
252b5132
RH
10
11@c @smallbook
12
ff5dcc92
SC
13@macro gcctabopt{body}
14@code{\body\}
15@end macro
16
0285c67d
NC
17@c man begin NAME
18@ifset man
19@c Configure for the generation of man pages
20@set UsesEnvVars
21@set GENERIC
0285c67d 22@set ARM
ac145307 23@set C6X
49fa1e15 24@set H8300
0285c67d 25@set HPPA
0285c67d 26@set I960
0285c67d 27@set M68HC11
7fb9f789 28@set M68K
833794fc 29@set MIPS
3c3bdf30 30@set MMIX
2469cfa2 31@set MSP430
35c08157 32@set NDS32
78058a5e 33@set NIOSII
2a60a7a8
AM
34@set POWERPC
35@set POWERPC64
49fa1e15
AM
36@set Renesas
37@set SPU
38@set TICOFF
2ca22b03 39@set WIN32
e0001a05 40@set XTENSA
0285c67d
NC
41@end ifset
42@c man end
43
9160ea82
AM
44@ifnottex
45@dircategory Software development
46@direntry
252b5132 47* Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
9160ea82
AM
48@end direntry
49@end ifnottex
252b5132 50
0e9517a9 51@copying
e49e529d
JM
52This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
53@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
54@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
55@end ifset
56version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 57
6f2750fe 58Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 59
cf055d54 60Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 61under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
cf055d54
NC
62or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
63with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
64Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 65section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0e9517a9 66@end copying
252b5132
RH
67@iftex
68@finalout
69@setchapternewpage odd
71ba23f6 70@settitle The GNU linker
252b5132 71@titlepage
71ba23f6 72@title The GNU linker
252b5132 73@sp 1
e49e529d
JM
74@subtitle @code{ld}
75@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
76@subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
77@end ifset
252b5132
RH
78@subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
79@author Steve Chamberlain
80@author Ian Lance Taylor
252b5132
RH
81@page
82
83@tex
84{\parskip=0pt
704c465c
NC
85\hfill Red Hat Inc\par
86\hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
71ba23f6 87\hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
252b5132
RH
88\hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
89}
90\global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
91@end tex
92
93@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
0285c67d 94@c man begin COPYRIGHT
6f2750fe 95Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2016 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
252b5132 96
0285c67d 97Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
793c5807 98under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
0285c67d
NC
99or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
100with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
101Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
36f63dca 102section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
0285c67d 103@c man end
252b5132 104
252b5132
RH
105@end titlepage
106@end iftex
4ecceb71 107@contents
252b5132
RH
108@c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
109
84ec0e6d 110@ifnottex
252b5132 111@node Top
71ba23f6 112@top LD
e49e529d
JM
113This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
114@ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
115@value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
116@end ifset
117version @value{VERSION}.
252b5132 118
cf055d54 119This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
793c5807
NC
120Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
121in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
cf055d54 122
252b5132
RH
123@menu
124* Overview:: Overview
125* Invocation:: Invocation
126* Scripts:: Linker Scripts
127@ifset GENERIC
128* Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
129@end ifset
130@ifclear GENERIC
131@ifset H8300
132* H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
133@end ifset
c2dcd04e
NC
134@ifset Renesas
135* Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
252b5132
RH
136@end ifset
137@ifset I960
138* i960:: ld and the Intel 960 family
139@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
140@ifset ARM
141* ARM:: ld and the ARM family
142@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
143@ifset M68HC11
144* M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
145@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
146@ifset HPPA
147* HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
148@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
149@ifset M68K
150* M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
151@end ifset
833794fc
MR
152@ifset MIPS
153* MIPS:: ld and MIPS family
154@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
155@ifset POWERPC
156* PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
157@end ifset
158@ifset POWERPC64
159* PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
160@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
161@ifset SPU
162* SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
163@end ifset
74459f0e
TW
164@ifset TICOFF
165* TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
166@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
167@ifset WIN32
168* Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
169@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
170@ifset XTENSA
171* Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
172@end ifset
252b5132
RH
173@end ifclear
174@ifclear SingleFormat
175* BFD:: BFD
176@end ifclear
177@c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
178
179* Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
180* MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
704c465c 181* GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
370b66a1 182* LD Index:: LD Index
252b5132 183@end menu
84ec0e6d 184@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
185
186@node Overview
187@chapter Overview
188
189@cindex @sc{gnu} linker
190@cindex what is this?
0285c67d 191
0879a67a 192@ifset man
0285c67d 193@c man begin SYNOPSIS
ff5dcc92 194ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
0285c67d
NC
195@c man end
196
197@c man begin SEEALSO
198ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
199the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
200@file{ld}.
201@c man end
202@end ifset
203
204@c man begin DESCRIPTION
205
ff5dcc92 206@command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
252b5132 207their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
ff5dcc92 208compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
252b5132 209
ff5dcc92 210@command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
252b5132
RH
211a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
212to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
213
0285c67d
NC
214@ifset man
215@c For the man only
ece2d90e 216This man page does not describe the command language; see the
71ba23f6
NC
217@command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
218language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
0285c67d
NC
219@end ifset
220
252b5132 221@ifclear SingleFormat
ff5dcc92
SC
222This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
223to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
252b5132
RH
224write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
225@code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
226available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
227@end ifclear
228
229Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
230linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
231execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
ff5dcc92 232@command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
252b5132
RH
233(or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
234
0285c67d
NC
235@c man end
236
252b5132
RH
237@node Invocation
238@chapter Invocation
239
0285c67d
NC
240@c man begin DESCRIPTION
241
ff5dcc92 242The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
252b5132
RH
243and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
244you have many choices to control its behavior.
245
0285c67d
NC
246@c man end
247
252b5132
RH
248@ifset UsesEnvVars
249@menu
250* Options:: Command Line Options
251* Environment:: Environment Variables
252@end menu
253
254@node Options
255@section Command Line Options
256@end ifset
257
258@cindex command line
259@cindex options
0285c67d
NC
260
261@c man begin OPTIONS
262
252b5132
RH
263The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
264practice few of them are used in any particular context.
265@cindex standard Unix system
ff5dcc92 266For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
252b5132
RH
267object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
268link a file @code{hello.o}:
269
270@smallexample
271ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
272@end smallexample
273
ff5dcc92 274This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
252b5132
RH
275result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
276the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
277directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
278
ff5dcc92 279Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
511ab9e9
ILT
280point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
281as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
282which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
283files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
284different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
252b5132
RH
285occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
286option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
287noted in the descriptions below.
288
289@cindex object files
511ab9e9
ILT
290Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
291together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
292options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
293an option and its argument.
252b5132
RH
294
295Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
296specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
297and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
298are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
299message @samp{No input files}.
300
36f63dca 301If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
252b5132
RH
302assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
303augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
304linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
305permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
306or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
53d25da6
AM
307@code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
308script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
309extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
310to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
311the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
252b5132
RH
312
313For options whose names are a single letter,
314option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
315whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
316option that requires them.
317
318For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
e4897a32 319precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
36f63dca 320@samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
e4897a32 321this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
ba1be17e 322only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
e4897a32
NC
323@samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
324name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
325output.
326
327Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
328option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
329immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
330@samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
331Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
332accepted.
252b5132 333
36f63dca
NC
334Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
335(e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command line options should be
fa19fce0
NC
336prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
337compiler driver) like this:
4e53152f
NC
338
339@smallexample
2509a395 340 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
4e53152f
NC
341@end smallexample
342
343This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
2509a395
SL
344silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
345may also arise when passing options that require values through a
346driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
347a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
348and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
349the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
350
351@smallexample
352 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
353@end smallexample
4e53152f
NC
354
355Here is a table of the generic command line switches accepted by the GNU
356linker:
357
ff5dcc92 358@table @gcctabopt
38fc1cb1 359@include at-file.texi
dff70155 360
2509a395
SL
361@kindex -a @var{keyword}
362@item -a @var{keyword}
252b5132
RH
363This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
364argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
365@samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
366@samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
367to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
368
7ee314fa
AM
369@kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
370@item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
371Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
372@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
373specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
374will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
375finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
9d5777a3 376it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
7ee314fa 377This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
9d5777a3 378interface.
7ee314fa 379
252b5132
RH
380@ifset I960
381@cindex architectures
2509a395
SL
382@kindex -A @var{arch}
383@item -A @var{architecture}
252b5132
RH
384@kindex --architecture=@var{arch}
385@itemx --architecture=@var{architecture}
ff5dcc92
SC
386In the current release of @command{ld}, this option is useful only for the
387Intel 960 family of architectures. In that @command{ld} configuration, the
252b5132
RH
388@var{architecture} argument identifies the particular architecture in
389the 960 family, enabling some safeguards and modifying the
ff5dcc92 390archive-library search path. @xref{i960,,@command{ld} and the Intel 960
252b5132
RH
391family}, for details.
392
ff5dcc92 393Future releases of @command{ld} may support similar functionality for
252b5132
RH
394other architecture families.
395@end ifset
396
397@ifclear SingleFormat
398@cindex binary input format
399@kindex -b @var{format}
400@kindex --format=@var{format}
401@cindex input format
402@cindex input format
403@item -b @var{input-format}
404@itemx --format=@var{input-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
405@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
406file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 407@samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
ff5dcc92 408that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
252b5132 409configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
ff5dcc92 410to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
252b5132
RH
411default input format the most usual format on each machine.
412@var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
413supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
414formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
415@xref{BFD}.
416
417You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
418binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
419linking object files of different formats), by including
420@samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
a1ab1d2a 421particular format.
252b5132
RH
422
423The default format is taken from the environment variable
424@code{GNUTARGET}.
425@ifset UsesEnvVars
426@xref{Environment}.
427@end ifset
428You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
0285c67d
NC
429@code{TARGET};
430@ifclear man
431see @ref{Format Commands}.
432@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
433@end ifclear
434
435@kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
436@kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
437@cindex compatibility, MRI
438@item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
439@itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
ff5dcc92 440For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
252b5132 441files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
0285c67d
NC
442@ifclear man
443@ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
444@end ifclear
445@ifset man
446the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
447@end ifset
448Introduce MRI script files with
252b5132 449the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
ff5dcc92
SC
450scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
451If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
252b5132
RH
452specified by any @samp{-L} options.
453
454@cindex common allocation
455@kindex -d
456@kindex -dc
457@kindex -dp
a1ab1d2a 458@item -d
252b5132
RH
459@itemx -dc
460@itemx -dp
461These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
462compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
463even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
464script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
465@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
466
7ee314fa
AM
467@kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
468@kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
469@item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
470@itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
471Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
472@var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
473specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
474will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
475option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
9d5777a3 476The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
7ee314fa 477
252b5132
RH
478@cindex entry point, from command line
479@kindex -e @var{entry}
480@kindex --entry=@var{entry}
a1ab1d2a 481@item -e @var{entry}
252b5132
RH
482@itemx --entry=@var{entry}
483Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
484program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
485named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
486and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
487base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
488@samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
489and other ways of specifying the entry point.
490
b58f81ae
DJ
491@kindex --exclude-libs
492@item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
493Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
e1c37eb5 494exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
b58f81ae
DJ
495@code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
496automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
497port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
498explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
499option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
500be treated as hidden.
501
e1c37eb5
DK
502@kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
503@item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
504Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
505should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
506into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
507may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
508used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
509the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
510match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
511command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
512of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
513regardless of this option.
514
252b5132
RH
515@cindex dynamic symbol table
516@kindex -E
517@kindex --export-dynamic
267e2722 518@kindex --no-export-dynamic
252b5132
RH
519@item -E
520@itemx --export-dynamic
267e2722
CD
521@itemx --no-export-dynamic
522When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
523option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
524all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
525set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
526
527If you do not use either of these options (or use the
528@option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
529dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
530referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
252b5132
RH
531
532If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
533back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
534dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
535linking the program itself.
536
55255dae 537You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
cb840a31 538be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
55255dae 539See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
cb840a31 540
8b747e1a
DK
541Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
542support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
543the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
544
36f63dca 545@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
546@cindex big-endian objects
547@cindex endianness
548@kindex -EB
549@item -EB
550Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
551
552@cindex little-endian objects
553@kindex -EL
554@item -EL
555Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
36f63dca 556@end ifclear
252b5132 557
2509a395
SL
558@kindex -f @var{name}
559@kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
560@item -f @var{name}
561@itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
562When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
563to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
564table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
565symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
566
567If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
568run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
569the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
570first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
571@var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
572in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
573Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
574implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
575machine specific performance.
576
577This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
578will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
579
2509a395
SL
580@kindex -F @var{name}
581@kindex --filter=@var{name}
252b5132 582@item -F @var{name}
2509a395 583@itemx --filter=@var{name}
252b5132
RH
584When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
585the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
586of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
587on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
588
589If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
590run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
591dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
592filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
593found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
594used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
595@var{name}.
596
ff5dcc92 597Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
252b5132 598toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
36f63dca
NC
599object files.
600@ifclear SingleFormat
601The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
ece2d90e 602@option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
252b5132 603@code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
36f63dca
NC
604environment variable.
605@end ifclear
606The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
607creating an ELF shared object.
252b5132 608
3dbf70a2 609@cindex finalization function
2509a395
SL
610@kindex -fini=@var{name}
611@item -fini=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
612When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
613executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
614address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
615the function to call.
616
252b5132
RH
617@kindex -g
618@item -g
619Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
620
2509a395
SL
621@kindex -G @var{value}
622@kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
252b5132 623@cindex object size
2509a395 624@item -G @var{value}
252b5132
RH
625@itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
626Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
627@var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
e8044f35 628MIPS ELF that support putting large and small objects into different
252b5132
RH
629sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
630
631@cindex runtime library name
2509a395 632@kindex -h @var{name}
252b5132 633@kindex -soname=@var{name}
2509a395 634@item -h @var{name}
252b5132
RH
635@itemx -soname=@var{name}
636When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
637the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
638which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
639linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
640field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
641
642@kindex -i
643@cindex incremental link
644@item -i
645Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
646
3dbf70a2 647@cindex initialization function
2509a395
SL
648@kindex -init=@var{name}
649@item -init=@var{name}
3dbf70a2
MM
650When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
651executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
652of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
653function to call.
654
252b5132 655@cindex archive files, from cmd line
2509a395 656@kindex -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf 657@kindex --library=@var{namespec}
2509a395 658@item -l @var{namespec}
bcb674cf
RS
659@itemx --library=@var{namespec}
660Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
661list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
662If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
07d8eb55 663will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
bcb674cf 664will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
252b5132 665
ff5dcc92 666On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
bcb674cf
RS
667files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
668and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
669called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
670@file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
671indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
672to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
673@var{filename}.
252b5132
RH
674
675The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
676specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
677was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
678command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
679archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
680the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
681
ff5dcc92 682See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
252b5132
RH
683archives multiple times.
684
685You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
686
687@ifset GENERIC
688This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
ff5dcc92 689if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
252b5132
RH
690behaviour of the AIX linker.
691@end ifset
692
693@cindex search directory, from cmd line
2509a395 694@kindex -L @var{dir}
252b5132 695@kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
2509a395 696@item -L @var{searchdir}
252b5132 697@itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
ff5dcc92
SC
698Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
699for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
252b5132
RH
700option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
701in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
702on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
ff5dcc92 703@option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
7d24f02c
KH
704order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
705how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
706option is specified.
252b5132 707
9c8ebd6a 708If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=}, then the @code{=} will be replaced
b3b9c41d
HPN
709by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, controlled by the @samp{--sysroot} option, or
710specified when the linker is configured.
9c8ebd6a 711
252b5132
RH
712@ifset UsesEnvVars
713The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
ff5dcc92 714@samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
252b5132
RH
715some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
716@end ifset
717
718The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
719@code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
720at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
721
722@cindex emulation
723@kindex -m @var{emulation}
2509a395 724@item -m @var{emulation}
252b5132
RH
725Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
726emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
727
728If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
729@code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
730
731Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
732configured.
733
734@cindex link map
735@kindex -M
736@kindex --print-map
737@item -M
738@itemx --print-map
739Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
740information about the link, including the following:
741
742@itemize @bullet
743@item
3b83e13a 744Where object files are mapped into memory.
252b5132
RH
745@item
746How common symbols are allocated.
747@item
748All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
749which caused the archive member to be brought in.
3b83e13a
NC
750@item
751The values assigned to symbols.
752
753Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
754involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
755have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
756linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
757of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
758the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
759linker script containing:
760
761@smallexample
762 foo = 1
763 foo = foo * 4
764 foo = foo + 8
765@end smallexample
766
767will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
768option is used:
769
770@smallexample
771 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
772 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
773 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
774@end smallexample
775
776See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
777scripts.
252b5132
RH
778@end itemize
779
780@kindex -n
781@cindex read-only text
782@cindex NMAGIC
783@kindex --nmagic
784@item -n
785@itemx --nmagic
90f5d9d9
JZ
786Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
787libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
788mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
252b5132
RH
789
790@kindex -N
791@kindex --omagic
792@cindex read/write from cmd line
793@cindex OMAGIC
a1ab1d2a 794@item -N
252b5132
RH
795@itemx --omagic
796Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
63fd3b82
NC
797not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
798libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
4d8907ac
DS
799mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
800is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
801specification published by Microsoft.
63fd3b82
NC
802
803@kindex --no-omagic
804@cindex OMAGIC
805@item --no-omagic
806This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
807sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
808be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
809shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
252b5132
RH
810
811@kindex -o @var{output}
812@kindex --output=@var{output}
813@cindex naming the output file
814@item -o @var{output}
815@itemx --output=@var{output}
ff5dcc92 816Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
252b5132
RH
817option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
818script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
819
820@kindex -O @var{level}
821@cindex generating optimized output
822@item -O @var{level}
ff5dcc92 823If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
252b5132 824the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
98c503ac
NC
825should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
826option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
827the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
828no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
829of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
252b5132 830
26278bb8
UD
831@kindex --push-state
832@cindex push state governing input file handling
833@item --push-state
834The @option{--push-state} allows to preserve the current state of the
835flags which govern the input file handling so that they can all be
836restored with one corresponding @option{--pop-state} option.
837
838The option which are covered are: @option{-Bdynamic}, @option{-Bstatic},
839@option{-dn}, @option{-dy}, @option{-call_shared}, @option{-non_shared},
840@option{-static}, @option{-N}, @option{-n}, @option{--whole-archive},
841@option{--no-whole-archive}, @option{-r}, @option{-Ur},
842@option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}, @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries},
843@option{--as-needed}, @option{--no-as-needed}, and @option{-a}.
844
845One target for this option are specifications for @file{pkg-config}. When
846used with the @option{--libs} option all possibly needed libraries are
847listed and then possibly linked with all the time. It is better to return
848something as follows:
849
850@smallexample
851-Wl,--push-state,--as-needed -libone -libtwo -Wl,--pop-state
852@end smallexample
853
854@kindex --pop-state
855@cindex pop state governing input file handling
856Undoes the effect of --push-state, restores the previous values of the
857flags governing input file handling.
858
a712da20
NC
859@kindex -q
860@kindex --emit-relocs
861@cindex retain relocations in final executable
862@item -q
863@itemx --emit-relocs
ba1be17e 864Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
a712da20
NC
865Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
866order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
867in larger executables.
868
dbab7a7b
NC
869This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
870
4f471f39
RS
871@kindex --force-dynamic
872@cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
873@item --force-dynamic
874Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
875to VxWorks targets.
876
252b5132
RH
877@cindex partial link
878@cindex relocatable output
879@kindex -r
1049f94e 880@kindex --relocatable
252b5132 881@item -r
1049f94e 882@itemx --relocatable
252b5132 883Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 884turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
252b5132
RH
885linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
886magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
887@code{OMAGIC}.
ff5dcc92 888@c ; see @option{-N}.
252b5132
RH
889If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
890linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
891constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
892
62bf86b4
HPN
893When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
894partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
895relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
896example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
897with input files in other formats at all.
898
252b5132
RH
899This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
900
901@kindex -R @var{file}
902@kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
903@cindex symbol-only input
904@item -R @var{filename}
905@itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
906Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
907relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
908to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
909programs. You may use this option more than once.
910
ff5dcc92 911For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 912followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 913the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
914
915@kindex -s
916@kindex --strip-all
917@cindex strip all symbols
a1ab1d2a 918@item -s
252b5132
RH
919@itemx --strip-all
920Omit all symbol information from the output file.
921
922@kindex -S
923@kindex --strip-debug
924@cindex strip debugger symbols
a1ab1d2a 925@item -S
252b5132
RH
926@itemx --strip-debug
927Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
928
929@kindex -t
930@kindex --trace
931@cindex input files, displaying
a1ab1d2a 932@item -t
252b5132 933@itemx --trace
ff5dcc92 934Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them.
252b5132
RH
935
936@kindex -T @var{script}
937@kindex --script=@var{script}
938@cindex script files
939@item -T @var{scriptfile}
940@itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
941Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
ff5dcc92 942@command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
252b5132 943@var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
114283d8
NC
944output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
945the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
946specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
947options accumulate.
252b5132 948
14be8564
L
949@kindex -dT @var{script}
950@kindex --default-script=@var{script}
951@cindex script files
952@item -dT @var{scriptfile}
953@itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
954Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
955
956This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
957processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
958command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
959@option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
960behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
961command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
962the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
963@samp{gcc}).
964
252b5132
RH
965@kindex -u @var{symbol}
966@kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
967@cindex undefined symbol
968@item -u @var{symbol}
969@itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
970Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
971symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
972modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
973different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
974option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
975
0a618243
AB
976If this option is being used to force additional modules to be pulled
977into the link, and if it is an error for the symbol to remain
978undefined, then the option @option{--require-defined} should be used
979instead.
980
981@kindex --require-defined=@var{symbol}
982@cindex symbols, require defined
983@cindex defined symbol
984@item --require-defined=@var{symbol}
985Require that @var{symbol} is defined in the output file. This option
986is the same as option @option{--undefined} except that if @var{symbol}
987is not defined in the output file then the linker will issue an error
988and exit. The same effect can be achieved in a linker script by using
989@code{EXTERN}, @code{ASSERT} and @code{DEFINED} together. This option
990can be used multiple times to require additional symbols.
991
252b5132
RH
992@kindex -Ur
993@cindex constructors
a1ab1d2a 994@item -Ur
252b5132
RH
995For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
996@samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
ff5dcc92 997turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
252b5132
RH
998@emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
999It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
1000with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
1001be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
1002@samp{-r} for the others.
1003
c005eb9e
AB
1004@kindex --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1005@cindex orphan sections
1006@cindex sections, orphan
1007@item --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1008Control how orphan sections are handled. An orphan section is one not
1009specifically mentioned in a linker script. @xref{Orphan Sections}.
1010
1011@var{MODE} can have any of the following values:
1012
1013@table @code
1014@item place
1015Orphan sections are placed into a suitable output section following
1016the strategy described in @ref{Orphan Sections}. The option
1017@samp{--unique} also effects how sections are placed.
1018
1019@item discard
1020All orphan sections are discarded, by placing them in the
1021@samp{/DISCARD/} section (@pxref{Output Section Discarding}).
1022
1023@item warn
1024The linker will place the orphan section as for @code{place} and also
1025issue a warning.
1026
1027@item error
1028The linker will exit with an error if any orphan section is found.
1029@end table
1030
1031The default if @samp{--orphan-handling} is not given is @code{place}.
1032
577a0623
AM
1033@kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1034@item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1035Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
1036@var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
1037missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
1038specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
1039multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
1040input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
1041in a linker script.
a854a4a7 1042
252b5132
RH
1043@kindex -v
1044@kindex -V
1045@kindex --version
1046@cindex version
1047@item -v
1048@itemx --version
1049@itemx -V
ff5dcc92 1050Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
252b5132
RH
1051lists the supported emulations.
1052
1053@kindex -x
1054@kindex --discard-all
1055@cindex deleting local symbols
1056@item -x
1057@itemx --discard-all
1058Delete all local symbols.
1059
1060@kindex -X
1061@kindex --discard-locals
1062@cindex local symbols, deleting
a1ab1d2a 1063@item -X
252b5132 1064@itemx --discard-locals
3c68c38f
BW
1065Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
1066system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
1067or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
252b5132
RH
1068
1069@kindex -y @var{symbol}
1070@kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1071@cindex symbol tracing
1072@item -y @var{symbol}
1073@itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1074Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
1075option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1076to prepend an underscore.
1077
1078This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1079don't know where the reference is coming from.
1080
1081@kindex -Y @var{path}
1082@item -Y @var{path}
1083Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1084for Solaris compatibility.
1085
1086@kindex -z @var{keyword}
1087@item -z @var{keyword}
cd6d6c15
NC
1088The recognized keywords are:
1089@table @samp
1090
1091@item combreloc
1092Combines multiple reloc sections and sorts them to make dynamic symbol
1093lookup caching possible.
1094
1095@item defs
560e09e9 1096Disallows undefined symbols in object files. Undefined symbols in
07f3b6ad 1097shared libraries are still allowed.
cd6d6c15 1098
6aa29e7b
JJ
1099@item execstack
1100Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1101
b039ef04
L
1102@item global
1103This option is only meaningful when building a shared object. It makes
1104the symbols defined by this shared object available for symbol resolution
1105of subsequently loaded libraries.
1106
cd6d6c15
NC
1107@item initfirst
1108This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1109It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1110before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1111the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1112the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1113objects.
1114
1115@item interpose
1116Marks the object that its symbol table interposes before all symbols
1117but the primary executable.
1118
5fa222e4
AM
1119@item lazy
1120When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1121dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1122the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1123Lazy binding is the default.
1124
cd6d6c15
NC
1125@item loadfltr
1126Marks the object that its filters be processed immediately at
1127runtime.
1128
1129@item muldefs
1130Allows multiple definitions.
1131
1132@item nocombreloc
1133Disables multiple reloc sections combining.
1134
1135@item nocopyreloc
daf220f0
AM
1136Disable linker generated .dynbss variables used in place of variables
1137defined in shared libraries. May result in dynamic text relocations.
cd6d6c15
NC
1138
1139@item nodefaultlib
1140Marks the object that the search for dependencies of this object will
1141ignore any default library search paths.
1142
1143@item nodelete
1144Marks the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1145
1146@item nodlopen
1147Marks the object not available to @code{dlopen}.
1148
1149@item nodump
1150Marks the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1151
6aa29e7b
JJ
1152@item noexecstack
1153Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1154
8dfef1bd
L
1155@item text
1156Treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1157
1158@item notext
1159Don't treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1160
1161@item textoff
1162Don't treat DT_TEXTREL in shared object as error.
1163
6aa29e7b
JJ
1164@item norelro
1165Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1166
cd6d6c15
NC
1167@item now
1168When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1169dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1170when the shared library is linked to using dlopen, instead of
1171deferring function call resolution to the point when the function is
1172first called.
1173
1174@item origin
1175Marks the object may contain $ORIGIN.
1176
6aa29e7b
JJ
1177@item relro
1178Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object.
1179
24718e3b
L
1180@item max-page-size=@var{value}
1181Set the emulation maximum page size to @var{value}.
1182
1183@item common-page-size=@var{value}
1184Set the emulation common page size to @var{value}.
1185
04c3a755
NS
1186@item stack-size=@var{value}
1187Specify a stack size for in an ELF @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment.
1188Specifying zero will override any default non-zero sized
1189@code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment creation.
1190
d258b828
IZ
1191@item bndplt
1192Always generate BND prefix in PLT entries. Supported for Linux/x86_64.
1193
889c2a67
L
1194@item noextern-protected-data
1195Don't treat protected data symbol as external when building shared
1196library. This option overrides linker backend default. It can be used
1197to workaround incorrect relocations against protected data symbols
1198generated by compiler. Updates on protected data symbols by another
4dba69b9 1199module aren't visible to the resulting shared library. Supported for
889c2a67
L
1200i386 and x86-64.
1201
aec6b87e
L
1202@item nodynamic-undefined-weak
1203Don't treat undefined weak symbols as dynamic when building executable.
1204This option overrides linker backend default. It can be used to avoid
1205dynamic relocations against undefined weak symbols in executable.
1206Supported for i386 and x86-64.
1207
caa65211
L
1208@item call-nop=prefix-addr
1209@itemx call-nop=prefix-nop
1210@itemx call-nop=suffix-nop
1211@itemx call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}
1212@itemx call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}
1213Specify the 1-byte @code{NOP} padding when transforming indirect call
1214to a locally defined function, foo, via its GOT slot.
1215@option{call-nop=prefix-addr} generates @code{0x67 call foo}.
1216@option{call-nop=prefix-nop} generates @code{0x90 call foo}.
1217@option{call-nop=suffix-nop} generates @code{call foo 0x90}.
1218@option{call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}} generates @code{@var{byte} call foo}.
1219@option{call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}} generates @code{call foo @var{byte}}.
1220Supported for i386 and x86_64.
1221
cd6d6c15
NC
1222@end table
1223
ece2d90e 1224Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
252b5132
RH
1225
1226@kindex -(
1227@cindex groups of archives
1228@item -( @var{archives} -)
1229@itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1230The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1231either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1232
1233The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1234references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1235the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1236archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1237object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1238would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1239they all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1240resolved.
1241
1242Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1243it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1244more archives.
1245
69da35b5
NC
1246@kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1247@kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1248@item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1249@itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1250Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
2ca22b03 1251recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
69da35b5
NC
1252and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1253the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1254behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1255so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1256restore the old behaviour.
2ca22b03 1257
4a43e768
AM
1258@kindex --as-needed
1259@kindex --no-as-needed
1260@item --as-needed
1261@itemx --no-as-needed
1262This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
ddbb8a31 1263on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
4a43e768
AM
1264the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1265on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
ddbb8a31 1266needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
ffa9430d
AM
1267emitted for a library that @emph{at that point in the link} satisfies a
1268non-weak undefined symbol reference from a regular object file or, if
1240be6b
AM
1269the library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other needed libraries, a
1270non-weak undefined symbol reference from another needed dynamic library.
ffa9430d
AM
1271Object files or libraries appearing on the command line @emph{after}
1272the library in question do not affect whether the library is seen as
1273needed. This is similar to the rules for extraction of object files
1274from archives. @option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
4a43e768 1275
e56f61be
L
1276@kindex --add-needed
1277@kindex --no-add-needed
1278@item --add-needed
1279@itemx --no-add-needed
ddbb8a31
NC
1280These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1281their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1282options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1283and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
e56f61be 1284
252b5132
RH
1285@kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1286@item -assert @var{keyword}
1287This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1288
1289@kindex -Bdynamic
1290@kindex -dy
1291@kindex -call_shared
1292@item -Bdynamic
1293@itemx -dy
1294@itemx -call_shared
1295Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1296for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1297default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1298for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1299multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
da8bce14 1300@option{-l} options which follow it.
252b5132 1301
a1ab1d2a
UD
1302@kindex -Bgroup
1303@item -Bgroup
1304Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1305section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1306object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
560e09e9
NC
1307@option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1308only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
a1ab1d2a 1309
252b5132
RH
1310@kindex -Bstatic
1311@kindex -dn
1312@kindex -non_shared
1313@kindex -static
a1ab1d2a 1314@item -Bstatic
252b5132
RH
1315@itemx -dn
1316@itemx -non_shared
1317@itemx -static
1318Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1319platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1320variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1321may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
560e09e9 1322library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
e9156f74
NC
1323option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1324option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1325shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1326references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
ece2d90e 1327libraries.
252b5132
RH
1328
1329@kindex -Bsymbolic
1330@item -Bsymbolic
1331When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1332definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1333for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
e20365c5
L
1334within the shared library. This option can also be used with the
1335@option{--export-dynamic} option, when creating a position independent
1336executable, to bind references to global symbols to the definition within
1337the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which
1338support shared libraries and position independent executables.
252b5132 1339
40b36307
L
1340@kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1341@item -Bsymbolic-functions
1342When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
c0065db7 1343symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
e20365c5
L
1344This option can also be used with the @option{--export-dynamic} option,
1345when creating a position independent executable, to bind references
1346to global function symbols to the definition within the executable.
40b36307 1347This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
e20365c5 1348libraries and position independent executables.
40b36307 1349
55255dae
L
1350@kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1351@item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1352Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1353typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1354global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1355within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1356to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1357in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1358which support shared libraries.
1359
1360The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1361scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1362
40b36307
L
1363@kindex --dynamic-list-data
1364@item --dynamic-list-data
1365Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1366
1367@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1368@item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1369Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1370is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1371
0b8a70d9
L
1372@kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1373@item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1374Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1375
252b5132
RH
1376@kindex --check-sections
1377@kindex --no-check-sections
1378@item --check-sections
308b1ffd 1379@itemx --no-check-sections
252b5132 1380Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
7d816a17 1381been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
252b5132
RH
1382perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1383suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1384allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
560e09e9 1385restored by using the command line switch @option{--check-sections}.
02b0b1aa
NS
1386Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1387force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1388option.
252b5132 1389
ddbb8a31
NC
1390@kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1391@kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1392@item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1393@itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
9d5777a3 1394This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
ddbb8a31 1395by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
08efffb8 1396command line. Normally the linker won't add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
ddbb8a31 1397output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
08efffb8 1398input dynamic library. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
ddbb8a31 1399specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
08efffb8
MM
1400follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries added. The default
1401behaviour can be restored with @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
ddbb8a31
NC
1402
1403This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
08efffb8
MM
1404libraries. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries} dynamic libraries
1405mentioned on the command line will be recursively searched, following
1406their DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1407required by the output binary. With the default setting however
1408the searching of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the
1409dynamic library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
ddbb8a31
NC
1410symbols.
1411
252b5132
RH
1412@cindex cross reference table
1413@kindex --cref
1414@item --cref
1415Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1416generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1417Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1418
1419The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1420easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1421sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1422symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
049c1c8e
NC
1423definition. If the symbol is defined as a common value then any files
1424where this happens appear next. Finally any files that reference the
1425symbol are listed.
252b5132 1426
4818e05f
AM
1427@cindex common allocation
1428@kindex --no-define-common
1429@item --no-define-common
1430This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1431The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1432@xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1433
1434The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1435the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1436of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1437forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1438Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1439from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1440This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1441and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1442duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1443paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1444
252b5132 1445@cindex symbols, from command line
2509a395
SL
1446@kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1447@item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
252b5132
RH
1448Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1449address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1450times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1451limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1452context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1453symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1454constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
66bc8739
AM
1455using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments}).
1456@emph{Note:} there should be no white space between @var{symbol}, the
1457equals sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{expression}.
252b5132
RH
1458
1459@cindex demangling, from command line
28c309a2 1460@kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132 1461@kindex --no-demangle
28c309a2 1462@item --demangle[=@var{style}]
252b5132
RH
1463@itemx --no-demangle
1464These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1465and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1466present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1467underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
a1ab1d2a
UD
1468mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1469different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1470to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
28c309a2
NC
1471demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1472is set. These options may be used to override the default.
252b5132
RH
1473
1474@cindex dynamic linker, from command line
506eee22 1475@kindex -I@var{file}
2509a395
SL
1476@kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1477@item -I@var{file}
1478@itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
252b5132
RH
1479Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1480generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1481linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1482doing.
1483
9b8b325a
RF
1484@kindex --no-dynamic-linker
1485@item --no-dynamic-linker
1486When producing an executable file, omit the request for a dynamic
1487linker to be used at load-time. This is only meaningful for ELF
1488executables that contain dynamic relocations, and usually requires
1489entry point code that is capable of processing these relocations.
1490
7ce691ae 1491@kindex --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd 1492@kindex --no-fatal-warnings
7ce691ae 1493@item --fatal-warnings
0fe58ccd
NC
1494@itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1495Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1496with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
7ce691ae 1497
252b5132
RH
1498@kindex --force-exe-suffix
1499@item --force-exe-suffix
1500Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1501
1502If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1503@code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1504the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1505option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1506Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1507it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1508
1509@kindex --gc-sections
1510@kindex --no-gc-sections
1511@cindex garbage collection
c17d87de
NC
1512@item --gc-sections
1513@itemx --no-gc-sections
252b5132 1514Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
ac69cbc6 1515targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
b3549761 1516performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
0f088b2a
KT
1517@samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line. Note that garbage
1518collection for COFF and PE format targets is supported, but the
1519implementation is currently considered to be experimental.
252b5132 1520
d5465ba2
AM
1521@samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1522examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1523symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1524command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1525referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1526libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1527referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1528the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1529relocations. See @samp{--entry} and @samp{--undefined}.
1530
ac69cbc6 1531This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
9d5777a3 1532@samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
ac69cbc6
TG
1533specified either by an @samp{--entry} or @samp{--undefined} option or by
1534a @code{ENTRY} command in the linker script.
1535
c17d87de
NC
1536@kindex --print-gc-sections
1537@kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1538@cindex garbage collection
1539@item --print-gc-sections
1540@itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1541List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1542printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1543collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1544default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1545be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1546line.
1547
30824704
RM
1548@kindex --print-output-format
1549@cindex output format
1550@item --print-output-format
1551Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
1552other command-line options). This is the string that would appear
1553in an @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} linker script command (@pxref{File Commands}).
1554
3604cb1f
TG
1555@kindex --print-memory-usage
1556@cindex memory usage
1557@item --print-memory-usage
1558Print used size, total size and used size of memory regions created with
1559the @ref{MEMORY} command. This is useful on embedded targets to have a
1560quick view of amount of free memory. The format of the output has one
1561headline and one line per region. It is both human readable and easily
1562parsable by tools. Here is an example of an output:
1563
1564@smallexample
1565Memory region Used Size Region Size %age Used
1566 ROM: 256 KB 1 MB 25.00%
1567 RAM: 32 B 2 GB 0.00%
1568@end smallexample
1569
252b5132
RH
1570@cindex help
1571@cindex usage
1572@kindex --help
1573@item --help
1574Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1575
ea20a7da
CC
1576@kindex --target-help
1577@item --target-help
1578Print a summary of all target specific options on the standard output and exit.
1579
2509a395
SL
1580@kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1581@item -Map=@var{mapfile}
252b5132 1582Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
560e09e9 1583@option{-M} option, above.
252b5132
RH
1584
1585@cindex memory usage
1586@kindex --no-keep-memory
1587@item --no-keep-memory
ff5dcc92
SC
1588@command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1589symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
252b5132 1590instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
ff5dcc92 1591necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
252b5132
RH
1592while linking a large executable.
1593
1594@kindex --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1595@kindex -z defs
252b5132 1596@item --no-undefined
a1ab1d2a 1597@itemx -z defs
560e09e9
NC
1598Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1599is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1600The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1601behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
ece2d90e 1602libraries being linked in.
252b5132 1603
aa713662
L
1604@kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1605@kindex -z muldefs
1606@item --allow-multiple-definition
1607@itemx -z muldefs
1608Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1609report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1610first definition will be used.
1611
b79e8c78 1612@kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1613@kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
b79e8c78 1614@item --allow-shlib-undefined
ae9a127f 1615@itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
903249d7 1616Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
560e09e9
NC
1617This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1618determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1619shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1620how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1621
903249d7
NC
1622The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1623referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1624an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1625a shared library.
1626
1627The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1628libraries specified at link time are that:
1629
1630@itemize @bullet
1631@item
1632A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1633that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1634resolvable at load time.
1635@item
1636There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1637symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1638
1639The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1640select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1641architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1642appropriate memset function.
1643@end itemize
b79e8c78 1644
31941635
L
1645@kindex --no-undefined-version
1646@item --no-undefined-version
1647Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1648it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1649will be issued instead.
1650
3e3b46e5
PB
1651@kindex --default-symver
1652@item --default-symver
1653Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
fc0e6df6
PB
1654exported symbols.
1655
1656@kindex --default-imported-symver
1657@item --default-imported-symver
1658Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1659imported symbols.
3e3b46e5 1660
252b5132
RH
1661@kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1662@item --no-warn-mismatch
ff5dcc92 1663Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
252b5132
RH
1664files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1665been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
ff5dcc92 1666This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
252b5132
RH
1667errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1668have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1669inappropriate.
1670
fe7929ce
AM
1671@kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1672@item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1673Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1674library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1675
252b5132
RH
1676@kindex --no-whole-archive
1677@item --no-whole-archive
ff5dcc92 1678Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
252b5132
RH
1679archive files.
1680
1681@cindex output file after errors
1682@kindex --noinhibit-exec
1683@item --noinhibit-exec
1684Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1685Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1686errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1687when it issues any error whatsoever.
1688
0a9c1c8e
CD
1689@kindex -nostdlib
1690@item -nostdlib
1691Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1692command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1693(including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1694
252b5132 1695@ifclear SingleFormat
2509a395
SL
1696@kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1697@item --oformat=@var{output-format}
ff5dcc92
SC
1698@command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1699file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
252b5132 1700@samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
ff5dcc92
SC
1701object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1702object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
1703should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1704usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1705name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1706list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1707command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1708this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1709@end ifclear
1710
36af4a4e
JJ
1711@kindex -pie
1712@kindex --pic-executable
1713@item -pie
1714@itemx --pic-executable
1715@cindex position independent executables
1716Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1717ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1718libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
7e7d5768 1719address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
36af4a4e
JJ
1720normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1721defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1722
252b5132
RH
1723@kindex -qmagic
1724@item -qmagic
1725This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1726
1727@kindex -Qy
1728@item -Qy
1729This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1730
1731@kindex --relax
1732@cindex synthesizing linker
1733@cindex relaxing addressing modes
28d5f677 1734@cindex --no-relax
252b5132 1735@item --relax
28d5f677 1736@itemx --no-relax
a1ab1d2a 1737An option with machine dependent effects.
252b5132
RH
1738@ifset GENERIC
1739This option is only supported on a few targets.
1740@end ifset
1741@ifset H8300
ff5dcc92 1742@xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
252b5132
RH
1743@end ifset
1744@ifset I960
ff5dcc92 1745@xref{i960,, @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family}.
252b5132 1746@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
1747@ifset XTENSA
1748@xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1749@end ifset
93fd0973
SC
1750@ifset M68HC11
1751@xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1752@end ifset
78058a5e
SL
1753@ifset NIOSII
1754@xref{Nios II,,@command{ld} and the Altera Nios II}.
1755@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
1756@ifset POWERPC
1757@xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1758@end ifset
252b5132 1759
28d5f677
NC
1760On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target specific,
1761global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1762addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1763synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
11e7fd74 1764instructions, and combining constant values.
252b5132
RH
1765
1766On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1767debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1768@ifset GENERIC
28d5f677
NC
1769This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1770family of processors.
252b5132
RH
1771@end ifset
1772
1773@ifset GENERIC
1774On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1775but ignored.
1776@end ifset
1777
28d5f677
NC
1778On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1779@samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1780
252b5132
RH
1781@cindex retaining specified symbols
1782@cindex stripping all but some symbols
1783@cindex symbols, retaining selectively
2509a395
SL
1784@kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1785@item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
252b5132
RH
1786Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1787discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1788symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1789@ifset GENERIC
1790(such as VxWorks)
1791@end ifset
1792where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1793run-time memory.
1794
1795@samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1796or symbols needed for relocations.
1797
1798You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1799line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1800
1801@ifset GENERIC
2509a395 1802@item -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1803@cindex runtime library search path
2509a395 1804@kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
252b5132 1805Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
ff5dcc92 1806linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
252b5132 1807arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
ff5dcc92 1808them to locate shared objects at runtime. The @option{-rpath} option is
252b5132
RH
1809also used when locating shared objects which are needed by shared
1810objects explicitly included in the link; see the description of the
ff5dcc92 1811@option{-rpath-link} option. If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an
252b5132
RH
1812ELF executable, the contents of the environment variable
1813@code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it is defined.
1814
ff5dcc92 1815The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
d8506323 1816SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search path out of all the
ff5dcc92
SC
1817@option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1818runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1819options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1820gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
b45619c0 1821file systems.
252b5132 1822
ff5dcc92 1823For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
252b5132 1824followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
ff5dcc92 1825the @option{-rpath} option.
252b5132
RH
1826@end ifset
1827
1828@ifset GENERIC
1829@cindex link-time runtime library search path
2509a395
SL
1830@kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1831@item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
252b5132
RH
1832When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1833happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1834of the input files.
1835
1836When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1837non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1838shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
ff5dcc92 1839explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
252b5132 1840specifies the first set of directories to search. The
ff5dcc92 1841@option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
252b5132
RH
1842either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1843appearing multiple times.
1844
28c309a2
NC
1845This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
1846that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
1847is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
1848runtime linker would do.
1849
252b5132 1850The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
ece2d90e 1851libraries:
252b5132
RH
1852@enumerate
1853@item
ff5dcc92 1854Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
252b5132 1855@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1856Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
1857between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
1858specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
1859used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
ece2d90e
NC
1860at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
1861by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
1862the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
252b5132 1863@item
e2a83dd0
NC
1864On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
1865@option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
1866environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
252b5132 1867@item
ff5dcc92
SC
1868On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
1869directories specified using @option{-L} options.
252b5132 1870@item
a1b8d843 1871For a native linker, search the contents of the environment
e2a83dd0 1872variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
252b5132 1873@item
ec4eb78a
L
1874For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
1875@code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
1876libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
1877@code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
1878@item
252b5132
RH
1879The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
1880@item
1881For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
1882exists, the list of directories found in that file.
1883@end enumerate
1884
1885If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
1886warning and continue with the link.
1887@end ifset
1888
1889@kindex -shared
1890@kindex -Bshareable
1891@item -shared
1892@itemx -Bshareable
1893@cindex shared libraries
1894Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
1895and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
ff5dcc92 1896shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
252b5132
RH
1897undefined symbols in the link.
1898
252b5132 1899@kindex --sort-common
2509a395
SL
1900@item --sort-common
1901@itemx --sort-common=ascending
1902@itemx --sort-common=descending
de7dd2bd
NC
1903This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
1904ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
1905sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
1906eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
1907between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
1908specified, then descending order is assumed.
252b5132 1909
2509a395
SL
1910@kindex --sort-section=name
1911@item --sort-section=name
bcaa7b3e
L
1912This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
1913patterns in the linker script.
1914
2509a395
SL
1915@kindex --sort-section=alignment
1916@item --sort-section=alignment
bcaa7b3e
L
1917This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
1918patterns in the linker script.
1919
252b5132 1920@kindex --split-by-file
2509a395 1921@item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
ff5dcc92 1922Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
a854a4a7
AM
1923each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
1924size of 1 if not given.
252b5132
RH
1925
1926@kindex --split-by-reloc
2509a395 1927@item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
a854a4a7 1928Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
252b5132 1929output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
a854a4a7 1930This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
252b5132
RH
1931certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
1932cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
1933that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
1934support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
1935input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
1936more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
a854a4a7 1937many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
252b5132
RH
1938
1939@kindex --stats
1940@item --stats
1941Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
1942as execution time and memory usage.
1943
2509a395 1944@kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
e2243057
RS
1945@item --sysroot=@var{directory}
1946Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
1947configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
1948that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
1949
252b5132
RH
1950@kindex --traditional-format
1951@cindex traditional format
1952@item --traditional-format
ff5dcc92
SC
1953For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
1954the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
252b5132
RH
1955use the traditional format instead.
1956
1957@cindex dbx
ff5dcc92 1958For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
252b5132
RH
1959symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
1960full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
1961@code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
ff5dcc92 1962trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
252b5132
RH
1963combine duplicate entries.
1964
2509a395
SL
1965@kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
1966@item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
176355da
NC
1967Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
1968address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
1969times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
1970line.
1971@var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
1972for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
1973@samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
1974should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
1975sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
1976
2509a395
SL
1977@kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
1978@kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
1979@kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
252b5132 1980@cindex segment origins, cmd line
2509a395
SL
1981@item -Tbss=@var{org}
1982@itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
1983@itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
1984Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
a6e02871 1985@code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
252b5132 1986
2509a395
SL
1987@kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
1988@item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
258795f5 1989@cindex text segment origin, cmd line
2b8c06a3
L
1990When creating an ELF executable, it will set the address of the first
1991byte of the text segment.
258795f5 1992
9d5777a3
RM
1993@kindex -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
1994@item -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
1995@cindex rodata segment origin, cmd line
1996When creating an ELF executable or shared object for a target where
1997the read-only data is in its own segment separate from the executable
1998text, it will set the address of the first byte of the read-only data segment.
1999
0d705e9f
AM
2000@kindex -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2001@item -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2002@cindex ldata segment origin, cmd line
2003When creating an ELF executable or shared object for x86-64 medium memory
2004model, it will set the address of the first byte of the ldata segment.
2005
560e09e9
NC
2006@kindex --unresolved-symbols
2007@item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
2008Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
2009values for @samp{method}:
2010
2011@table @samp
2012@item ignore-all
da8bce14 2013Do not report any unresolved symbols.
560e09e9
NC
2014
2015@item report-all
da8bce14 2016Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
560e09e9
NC
2017
2018@item ignore-in-object-files
2019Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
2020ignore them if they come from regular object files.
2021
2022@item ignore-in-shared-libs
2023Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
2024ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
2025when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
2026libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
2027command line.
2028@end table
2029
2030The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
2031by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
2032
2033Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
2034unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
2035can change this to a warning.
2036
1715a13c
L
2037@kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2038@cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
252b5132 2039@item --dll-verbose
1715a13c 2040@itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
ff5dcc92 2041Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
252b5132 2042supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
1715a13c
L
2043the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
2044argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
252b5132
RH
2045
2046@kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
2047@cindex version script, symbol versions
2509a395 2048@item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
252b5132
RH
2049Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
2050used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
36f63dca 2051about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
09e2aba4
DK
2052is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
2053see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
2054use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
2055symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
2056@xref{WIN32}.
252b5132 2057
7ce691ae 2058@kindex --warn-common
252b5132
RH
2059@cindex warnings, on combining symbols
2060@cindex combining symbols, warnings on
2061@item --warn-common
2062Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
11e7fd74 2063a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practice,
252b5132
RH
2064but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
2065you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
11e7fd74 2066Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practice, so you may get some
252b5132
RH
2067warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
2068
2069There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
2070
2071@table @samp
2072@item int i = 1;
2073A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
2074file.
2075
2076@item extern int i;
2077An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
2078There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
2079variable somewhere.
2080
2081@item int i;
2082A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
2083variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
2084The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
2085single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
2086size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
2087a definition of the same variable.
2088@end table
2089
2090The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
2091Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
2092just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
2093encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
2094a common symbol.
2095
2096@enumerate
2097@item
2098Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
2099definition for the symbol.
2100@smallexample
2101@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2102 overridden by definition
2103@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
2104@end smallexample
2105
2106@item
2107Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
2108the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
2109except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
2110@smallexample
2111@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
2112 overriding common
2113@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
2114@end smallexample
2115
2116@item
2117Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
2118@smallexample
2119@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
2120 of `@var{symbol}'
2121@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
2122@end smallexample
2123
2124@item
2125Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
2126@smallexample
2127@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2128 overridden by larger common
2129@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
2130@end smallexample
2131
2132@item
2133Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
2134the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
2135encountered in a different order.
2136@smallexample
2137@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2138 overriding smaller common
2139@var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
2140@end smallexample
2141@end enumerate
2142
2143@kindex --warn-constructors
2144@item --warn-constructors
2145Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
2146object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
2147detect the use of global constructors.
2148
2149@kindex --warn-multiple-gp
2150@item --warn-multiple-gp
2151Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
2152This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
2153Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
2154section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
2155of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
2156base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
2157base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
2158bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
2159large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
2160values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
2161option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
2162
2163@kindex --warn-once
2164@cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
2165@cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
2166@item --warn-once
2167Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
2168which refers to it.
2169
2170@kindex --warn-section-align
2171@cindex warnings, on section alignment
2172@cindex section alignment, warnings on
2173@item --warn-section-align
2174Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
2175alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
2176The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
2177is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
2178the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
2179
8fdd7217
NC
2180@kindex --warn-shared-textrel
2181@item --warn-shared-textrel
ece2d90e 2182Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
8fdd7217 2183
a0c402a5
L
2184@kindex --warn-alternate-em
2185@item --warn-alternate-em
2186Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2187
560e09e9
NC
2188@kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2189@item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2190If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2191@option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2192This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2193
2194@kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2195@item --error-unresolved-symbols
2196This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2197it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2198
252b5132
RH
2199@kindex --whole-archive
2200@cindex including an entire archive
2201@item --whole-archive
2202For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
ff5dcc92 2203@option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
252b5132
RH
2204in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2205files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2206library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2207library. This option may be used more than once.
2208
7ec229ce 2209Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
ff5dcc92
SC
2210about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2211Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
7ec229ce
DD
2212list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2213your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2214
2509a395
SL
2215@kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2216@item --wrap=@var{symbol}
252b5132
RH
2217Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2218@var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2219undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2220@var{symbol}.
2221
2222This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2223wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2224wishes to call the system function, it should call
2225@code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2226
2227Here is a trivial example:
2228
2229@smallexample
2230void *
cc2f008e 2231__wrap_malloc (size_t c)
252b5132 2232@{
cc2f008e 2233 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
252b5132
RH
2234 return __real_malloc (c);
2235@}
2236@end smallexample
2237
ff5dcc92 2238If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
252b5132
RH
2239all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2240instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2241call the real @code{malloc} function.
2242
2243You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
ff5dcc92 2244links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
252b5132
RH
2245you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2246file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2247call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2248
6aa29e7b
JJ
2249@kindex --eh-frame-hdr
2250@item --eh-frame-hdr
2251Request creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr} section and ELF
2252@code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
2253
e41b3a13
JJ
2254@kindex --ld-generated-unwind-info
2255@item --no-ld-generated-unwind-info
2256Request creation of @code{.eh_frame} unwind info for linker
2257generated code sections like PLT. This option is on by default
2258if linker generated unwind info is supported.
2259
6c1439be
L
2260@kindex --enable-new-dtags
2261@kindex --disable-new-dtags
2262@item --enable-new-dtags
2263@itemx --disable-new-dtags
2264This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2265systems may not understand them. If you specify
b1b00fcc
MF
2266@option{--enable-new-dtags}, the new dynamic tags will be created as needed
2267and older dynamic tags will be omitted.
ff5dcc92 2268If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
6c1439be
L
2269created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2270those options are only available for ELF systems.
2271
2d643429 2272@kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
e185dd51 2273@item --hash-size=@var{number}
2d643429
NC
2274Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2275close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2276time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2277increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2278value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2279
fdc90cb4
JJ
2280@kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2281@item --hash-style=@var{style}
2282Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2283@code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2284new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2285the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2286hash tables. The default is @code{sysv}.
2287
0ce398f1
L
2288@kindex --compress-debug-sections=none
2289@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2290@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2291@kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2292@item --compress-debug-sections=none
2293@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2294@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2295@itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2296On ELF platforms , these options control how DWARF debug sections are
2297compressed using zlib. @option{--compress-debug-sections=none} doesn't
19a7fe52
L
2298compress DWARF debug sections.
2299@option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu} compresses DWARF debug
0ce398f1 2300sections and rename debug section names to begin with @samp{.zdebug}
19a7fe52
L
2301instead of @samp{.debug}. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib}
2302and @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}
2303compress DWARF debug sections with SHF_COMPRESSED from the ELF ABI.
6c3bc0f8
NC
2304The default behaviour varies depending upon the target involved and
2305the configure options used to build the toolchain. The default can be
2306determined by examing the output from the linker's @option{--help} option.
0ce398f1 2307
35835446
JR
2308@kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2309@item --reduce-memory-overheads
2310This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
f2a8f148 2311linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
35835446 2312for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2d643429
NC
2313about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2314
4f9c04f7 2315Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2d643429 23161021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
a85785bc 2317run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2d643429
NC
2318has been used.
2319
2320The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2321enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
35835446 2322
c0065db7
RM
2323@kindex --build-id
2324@kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2325@item --build-id
2326@itemx --build-id=@var{style}
61e2488c 2327Request the creation of a @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section
6033bf41 2328or a @code{.buildid} COFF section. The contents of the note are
61e2488c
JT
2329unique bits identifying this linked file. @var{style} can be
2330@code{uuid} to use 128 random bits, @code{sha1} to use a 160-bit
2331@sc{SHA1} hash on the normative parts of the output contents,
2332@code{md5} to use a 128-bit @sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of
2333the output contents, or @code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit
2334string specified as an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and
2335@code{:} characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style}
2336is omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
24382dca
RM
2337
2338The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2339that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2340unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2341to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2342file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2343string identifying the original linked file does not change.
c0065db7
RM
2344
2345Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2346@code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
252b5132
RH
2347@end table
2348
0285c67d
NC
2349@c man end
2350
36f63dca 2351@subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
252b5132 2352
0285c67d
NC
2353@c man begin OPTIONS
2354
ff5dcc92 2355The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
252b5132
RH
2356the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2357normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2358use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2359@code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2360like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2361symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2362object file).
2363
2364In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2365support additional command line options that are specific to the i386
2366PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2367values by either a space or an equals sign.
2368
ff5dcc92 2369@table @gcctabopt
252b5132
RH
2370
2371@kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2372@item --add-stdcall-alias
2373If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2374as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
bb10df36 2375[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2376
2377@kindex --base-file
2378@item --base-file @var{file}
2379Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2380addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2381@file{dlltool}.
bb10df36 2382[This is an i386 PE specific option]
252b5132
RH
2383
2384@kindex --dll
2385@item --dll
2386Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
ff5dcc92 2387@option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
252b5132 2388file.
bb10df36 2389[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2390
88183869
DK
2391@kindex --enable-long-section-names
2392@kindex --disable-long-section-names
2393@item --enable-long-section-names
2394@itemx --disable-long-section-names
56e6cf80 2395The PE variants of the COFF object format add an extension that permits
88183869 2396the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
56e6cf80
NC
2397for COFF. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2398fully-linked executable images do not carry the COFF string table required
88183869
DK
2399to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2400allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2401disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2402generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2403as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
9d5777a3
RM
2404with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2405GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
3efd345c
DK
2406information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2407option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2408section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2409when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2410image and not stripping symbols.
88183869
DK
2411[This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2412
252b5132
RH
2413@kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2414@kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2415@item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2416@itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2417If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
36f63dca 2418do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
252b5132
RH
2419only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2420resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2421undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2422@code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2423to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2424warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2425import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
ff5dcc92 2426to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
252b5132 2427feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
ff5dcc92 2428@option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
252b5132 2429mismatches are considered to be errors.
bb10df36 2430[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2431
522f09cd
KT
2432@kindex --leading-underscore
2433@kindex --no-leading-underscore
2434@item --leading-underscore
2435@itemx --no-leading-underscore
2436For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2437in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2438disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2439
252b5132
RH
2440@cindex DLLs, creating
2441@kindex --export-all-symbols
2442@item --export-all-symbols
2443If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2444be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2445otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2446explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2447attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2448option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
ece2d90e 2449@code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
b044cda1 2450@code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
ece2d90e
NC
2451exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2452re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2453such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2454@code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
b044cda1
CW
2455@code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2456Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2457not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
ece2d90e 2458extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
b044cda1 2459(obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
ece2d90e 2460These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
b044cda1 2461@code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
ece2d90e 2462@code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
b044cda1 2463@code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
ece2d90e 2464@code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
bb10df36 2465[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2466
2467@kindex --exclude-symbols
1d0a3c9c 2468@item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
252b5132
RH
2469Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2470exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
bb10df36 2471[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2472
2927aaca
NC
2473@kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2474@item --exclude-all-symbols
2475Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2476[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2477
252b5132
RH
2478@kindex --file-alignment
2479@item --file-alignment
2480Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2481file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2482512.
bb10df36 2483[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2484
2485@cindex heap size
2486@kindex --heap
2487@item --heap @var{reserve}
2488@itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5 2489Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
fe6d7d6a 2490to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1MB reserved, 4K
252b5132 2491committed.
bb10df36 2492[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2493
2494@cindex image base
2495@kindex --image-base
2496@item --image-base @var{value}
2497Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2498the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2499is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2500your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2501other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2502for dlls.
bb10df36 2503[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2504
2505@kindex --kill-at
2506@item --kill-at
2507If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2508symbols before they are exported.
bb10df36 2509[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2510
26d2d8a2
BF
2511@kindex --large-address-aware
2512@item --large-address-aware
b45619c0 2513If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
26d2d8a2 2514header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
b45619c0 2515greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
26d2d8a2
BF
2516or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2517section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2518[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2519
f69a2f97
NC
2520@kindex --disable-large-address-aware
2521@item --disable-large-address-aware
2522Reverts the effect of a previous @samp{--large-address-aware} option.
2523This is useful if @samp{--large-address-aware} is always set by the compiler
2524driver (e.g. Cygwin gcc) and the executable does not support virtual
2525addresses greater than 2 gigabytes.
2526[This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2527
252b5132
RH
2528@kindex --major-image-version
2529@item --major-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2530Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
bb10df36 2531[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2532
2533@kindex --major-os-version
2534@item --major-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2535Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2536[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2537
2538@kindex --major-subsystem-version
2539@item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2540Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
bb10df36 2541[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2542
2543@kindex --minor-image-version
2544@item --minor-image-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2545Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2546[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2547
2548@kindex --minor-os-version
2549@item --minor-os-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2550Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2551[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2552
2553@kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2554@item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
36f63dca 2555Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
bb10df36 2556[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2557
2558@cindex DEF files, creating
2559@cindex DLLs, creating
2560@kindex --output-def
2561@item --output-def @var{file}
2562The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2563file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2564(which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2565library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2566automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
bb10df36 2567[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2568
b044cda1
CW
2569@cindex DLLs, creating
2570@kindex --out-implib
2571@item --out-implib @var{file}
2572The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain an
2573import lib corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This
2574import lib (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a}
560e09e9 2575may be used to link clients against the generated DLL; this behaviour
b044cda1
CW
2576makes it possible to skip a separate @code{dlltool} import library
2577creation step.
bb10df36 2578[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2579
2580@kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2581@item --enable-auto-image-base
d0e6d77b
CF
2582@itemx --enable-auto-image-base=@var{value}
2583Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, optionally starting with base
2584@var{value}, unless one is specified using the @code{--image-base} argument.
2585By using a hash generated from the dllname to create unique image bases
2586for each DLL, in-memory collisions and relocations which can delay program
2587execution are avoided.
bb10df36 2588[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2589
2590@kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2591@item --disable-auto-image-base
2592Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2593user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2594default.
bb10df36 2595[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2596
2597@cindex DLLs, linking to
2598@kindex --dll-search-prefix
2599@item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
489d0400 2600When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
ece2d90e 2601search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
560e09e9 2602@code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
b044cda1
CW
2603between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2604uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
ece2d90e 2605@code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
bb10df36 2606[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2607
2608@kindex --enable-auto-import
2609@item --enable-auto-import
ece2d90e
NC
2610Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2611DATA imports from DLLs, and create the necessary thunking symbols when
4d8907ac
DS
2612building the import libraries with those DATA exports. Note: Use of the
2613'auto-import' extension will cause the text section of the image file
2614to be made writable. This does not conform to the PE-COFF format
2615specification published by Microsoft.
2616
e2a83dd0
NC
2617Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2618data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2619placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2620around a problem with consts that is described here:
2621http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2622
4d8907ac
DS
2623Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2624see this message:
0d888aac 2625
ece2d90e 2626"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
0d888aac
CW
2627documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2628
ece2d90e
NC
2629This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2630ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
c0065db7
RM
2631allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2632fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2633constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2f8d8971
NC
2634multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2635this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2636of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2637the warning, and exit.
2638
2639There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2640data type of the exported variable:
0d888aac 2641
2fa9fc65
NC
2642One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2643of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
560e09e9 2644this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2fa9fc65 2645
c0065db7
RM
2646A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2647that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2648there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
0d888aac
CW
2649a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2650
2651@example
2652extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2653extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2654 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2655@end example
2656
2657or
2658
2659@example
2660extern type extern_array[];
c0065db7 2661extern_array[1] -->
0d888aac
CW
2662 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2663@end example
2664
c0065db7 2665For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2f8d8971 2666is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
0d888aac
CW
2667
2668@example
2669extern struct s extern_struct;
c0065db7 2670extern_struct.field -->
0d888aac
CW
2671 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2672@end example
2673
c406afaf
NC
2674or
2675
2676@example
2677extern long long extern_ll;
2678extern_ll -->
2679 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2680@end example
2681
2fa9fc65 2682A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
c0065db7 2683'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
11e7fd74 2684@code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practice that
0d888aac 2685requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
c0065db7
RM
2686building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2687merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2688between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
0d888aac
CW
2689constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2690
2691Original:
2692@example
2693--foo.h
2694extern int arr[];
2695--foo.c
2696#include "foo.h"
2697void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2698 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2699@}
2700@end example
2701
2702Solution 1:
2703@example
2704--foo.h
2705extern int arr[];
2706--foo.c
2707#include "foo.h"
2708void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2709 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2710 volatile int *parr = arr;
2711 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2712@}
2713@end example
2714
2715Solution 2:
2716@example
2717--foo.h
2718/* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2719#if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2720 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2721#define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2722#else
2723#define FOO_IMPORT
2724#endif
2725extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2726--foo.c
2727#include "foo.h"
2728void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2729 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2730@}
2731@end example
2732
c0065db7 2733A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
0d888aac
CW
2734library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2735for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2736functions).
bb10df36 2737[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1
CW
2738
2739@kindex --disable-auto-import
2740@item --disable-auto-import
c0065db7 2741Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
b044cda1 2742@code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
bb10df36 2743[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2744
2fa9fc65
NC
2745@kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2746@item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2747If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2748that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2749a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
c0065db7 2750environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
bb10df36 2751[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65
NC
2752
2753@kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2754@item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2755Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from
676ee43b 2756DLLs.
bb10df36 2757[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2fa9fc65 2758
b044cda1
CW
2759@kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2760@item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2761Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
bb10df36 2762[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
b044cda1 2763
252b5132
RH
2764@kindex --section-alignment
2765@item --section-alignment
2766Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2767addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
bb10df36 2768[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2769
2770@cindex stack size
2771@kindex --stack
2772@item --stack @var{reserve}
2773@itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
a00b50c5 2774Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
fe6d7d6a 2775to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2MB reserved, 4K
252b5132 2776committed.
bb10df36 2777[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132
RH
2778
2779@kindex --subsystem
2780@item --subsystem @var{which}
2781@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2782@itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2783Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2784legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
33f362e1
NC
2785@code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2786the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2787@var{which}.
bb10df36 2788[This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
252b5132 2789
2f563b51
DK
2790The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2791of the PE file header:
2792[These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2793
2d5c3743
NC
2794@kindex --high-entropy-va
2795@item --high-entropy-va
2796Image is compatible with 64-bit address space layout randomization
2797(ASLR).
2798
2f563b51
DK
2799@kindex --dynamicbase
2800@item --dynamicbase
2801The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
2802randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
2803Vista for i386 PE targets.
2804
2805@kindex --forceinteg
2806@item --forceinteg
2807Code integrity checks are enforced.
2808
2809@kindex --nxcompat
2810@item --nxcompat
2811The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
2812This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
2813
2814@kindex --no-isolation
2815@item --no-isolation
2816Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
2817
2818@kindex --no-seh
2819@item --no-seh
2820The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
2821this image.
2822
2823@kindex --no-bind
2824@item --no-bind
2825Do not bind this image.
2826
2827@kindex --wdmdriver
2828@item --wdmdriver
2829The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
9d5777a3 2830
2f563b51
DK
2831@kindex --tsaware
2832@item --tsaware
2833The image is Terminal Server aware.
2834
0cb112f7
CF
2835@kindex --insert-timestamp
2836@item --insert-timestamp
eeb14e5a
LZ
2837@itemx --no-insert-timestamp
2838Insert a real timestamp into the image. This is the default behaviour
2839as it matches legacy code and it means that the image will work with
2840other, proprietary tools. The problem with this default is that it
56e6cf80 2841will result in slightly different images being produced each time the
eeb14e5a
LZ
2842same sources are linked. The option @option{--no-insert-timestamp}
2843can be used to insert a zero value for the timestamp, this ensuring
56e6cf80 2844that binaries produced from identical sources will compare
eeb14e5a 2845identically.
252b5132
RH
2846@end table
2847
0285c67d
NC
2848@c man end
2849
ac145307
BS
2850@ifset C6X
2851@subsection Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
2852
2853@c man begin OPTIONS
2854
2855The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support shared
2856libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a unique index;
2857all executables use an index of 0.
2858
2859@table @gcctabopt
2860
2861@kindex --dsbt-size
2862@item --dsbt-size @var{size}
56e6cf80 2863This option sets the number of entries in the DSBT of the current executable
ac145307
BS
2864or shared library to @var{size}. The default is to create a table with 64
2865entries.
2866
2867@kindex --dsbt-index
2868@item --dsbt-index @var{index}
2869This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared library
2870to @var{index}. The default is 0, which is appropriate for generating
2871executables. If a shared library is generated with a DSBT index of 0, the
2872@code{R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX} relocs are copied into the output file.
2873
fbd9ad90
PB
2874@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
2875The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent
2876exidx entries in frame unwind info.
2877
ac145307
BS
2878@end table
2879
2880@c man end
2881@end ifset
2882
93fd0973
SC
2883@ifset M68HC11
2884@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
2885
2886@c man begin OPTIONS
2887
2888The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
2889memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
2890
2891@table @gcctabopt
2892
2893@kindex --no-trampoline
2894@item --no-trampoline
2895This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
2896is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
2897instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
2898
2899@kindex --bank-window
2900@item --bank-window @var{name}
2901This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
2902the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
2903The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
2904paging and addresses within the memory window.
2905
2906@end table
2907
2908@c man end
2909@end ifset
2910
7fb9f789
NC
2911@ifset M68K
2912@subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
2913
2914@c man begin OPTIONS
2915
2916The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
2917when linking for 68K targets.
2918
2919@table @gcctabopt
2920
2921@kindex --got
2922@item --got=@var{type}
2923This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
2924@var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
2925@samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
2926Info entry for @file{ld}.
2927
2928@end table
2929
2930@c man end
2931@end ifset
2932
833794fc
MR
2933@ifset MIPS
2934@subsection Options specific to MIPS targets
2935
2936@c man begin OPTIONS
2937
2938The following options are supported to control microMIPS instruction
2939generation when linking for MIPS targets.
2940
2941@table @gcctabopt
2942
2943@kindex --insn32
2944@item --insn32
2945@kindex --no-insn32
2946@itemx --no-insn32
2947These options control the choice of microMIPS instructions used in code
2948generated by the linker, such as that in the PLT or lazy binding stubs,
2949or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is used, then the linker only uses
295032-bit instruction encodings. By default or if @samp{--no-insn32} is
2951used, all instruction encodings are used, including 16-bit ones where
2952possible.
2953
2954@end table
2955
2956@c man end
2957@end ifset
2958
252b5132
RH
2959@ifset UsesEnvVars
2960@node Environment
2961@section Environment Variables
2962
0285c67d
NC
2963@c man begin ENVIRONMENT
2964
560e09e9 2965You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
36f63dca
NC
2966@ifclear SingleFormat
2967@code{GNUTARGET},
2968@end ifclear
2969@code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
252b5132 2970
36f63dca 2971@ifclear SingleFormat
252b5132
RH
2972@kindex GNUTARGET
2973@cindex default input format
2974@code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
2975use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
2976of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
ff5dcc92 2977@code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
252b5132
RH
2978of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
2979attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
2980this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
2981there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
2982object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
2983BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
2984in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
36f63dca 2985@end ifclear
252b5132
RH
2986
2987@kindex LDEMULATION
2988@cindex default emulation
2989@cindex emulation, default
2990@code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
2991@samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
2992behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
2993available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
2994the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
2995variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
2996linker was configured.
252b5132
RH
2997
2998@kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
2999@cindex demangling, default
3000Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
3001@code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
3002default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
3003a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
3004may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
3005options.
3006
0285c67d
NC
3007@c man end
3008@end ifset
3009
252b5132
RH
3010@node Scripts
3011@chapter Linker Scripts
3012
3013@cindex scripts
3014@cindex linker scripts
3015@cindex command files
3016Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
3017written in the linker command language.
3018
3019The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
3020the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
3021the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
3022more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
3023direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
3024described below.
3025
3026The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
3027yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
3028linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command line option
3029to display the default linker script. Certain command line options,
3030such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
3031
3032You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
3033line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
3034default linker script.
3035
3036You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
3037to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
3038Linker Scripts}.
3039
3040@menu
3041* Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
3042* Script Format:: Linker Script Format
3043* Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
3044* Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
3045* Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
3046* SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
3047* MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
3048* PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
3049* VERSION:: VERSION Command
3050* Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
3051* Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
3052@end menu
3053
3054@node Basic Script Concepts
3055@section Basic Linker Script Concepts
3056@cindex linker script concepts
3057We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
3058describe the linker script language.
3059
3060The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
3061file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
3062@dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
3063The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
3064purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
3065among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
3066section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
3067in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
3068
3069Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
3070also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
56dd11f0 3071contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which means that
252b5132
RH
3072the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
3073A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
3074area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
3075loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
3076which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
3077of debugging information.
3078
3079Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
3080first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
3081the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
3082@dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
3083section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
3084same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
3085is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
3086(this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
3087based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
3088RAM address would be the VMA.
3089
3090You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
3091program with the @samp{-h} option.
3092
3093Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
3094@dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
3095has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
3096information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
3097will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
3098static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
3099referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
3100
3101You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
3102program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
3103option.
3104
3105@node Script Format
3106@section Linker Script Format
3107@cindex linker script format
3108Linker scripts are text files.
3109
3110You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
3111either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
3112symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
3113generally ignored.
3114
3115Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
3116If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
3117otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
3118double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
3119file name.
3120
3121You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
3122@samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
3123to whitespace.
3124
3125@node Simple Example
3126@section Simple Linker Script Example
3127@cindex linker script example
3128@cindex example of linker script
3129Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
3130
3131The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
3132@samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
3133memory layout of the output file.
3134
3135The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
3136describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
3137code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
3138@samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
3139Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
3140your input files.
3141
3142For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
31430x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
3144linker script which will do that:
3145@smallexample
3146SECTIONS
3147@{
3148 . = 0x10000;
3149 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3150 . = 0x8000000;
3151 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3152 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3153@}
3154@end smallexample
3155
3156You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
3157followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
3158descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
3159
252b5132
RH
3160The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
3161sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
3162counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
3163other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
3164current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
3165incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
3166@samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
3167
3168The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
3169required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
3170after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
3171which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
3172wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
3173means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
3174
3175Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
3176@samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
3177@samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
3178
3179The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
3180the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
3181at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
3182output section, the value of the location counter will be
3183@samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
3184effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
58434bc1 3185immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
252b5132
RH
3186
3187The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
3188alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
3189example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
3190sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
3191may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
3192sections.
3193
3194That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
3195
3196@node Simple Commands
3197@section Simple Linker Script Commands
3198@cindex linker script simple commands
3199In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
3200
3201@menu
3202* Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
3203* File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
3204@ifclear SingleFormat
3205* Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
3206@end ifclear
3207
4a93e180 3208* REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
252b5132
RH
3209* Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
3210@end menu
3211
3212@node Entry Point
36f63dca 3213@subsection Setting the Entry Point
252b5132
RH
3214@kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3215@cindex start of execution
3216@cindex first instruction
3217@cindex entry point
3218The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
3219point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
3220entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
3221@smallexample
3222ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3223@end smallexample
3224
3225There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
3226entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
3227stopping when one of them succeeds:
3228@itemize @bullet
a1ab1d2a 3229@item
252b5132 3230the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
a1ab1d2a 3231@item
252b5132 3232the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
a1ab1d2a 3233@item
3ab904c4
NC
3234the value of a target specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
3235targets this is @code{start}, but PE and BeOS based systems for example
3236check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
a1ab1d2a 3237@item
252b5132 3238the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
a1ab1d2a 3239@item
252b5132
RH
3240The address @code{0}.
3241@end itemize
3242
3243@node File Commands
36f63dca 3244@subsection Commands Dealing with Files
252b5132
RH
3245@cindex linker script file commands
3246Several linker script commands deal with files.
3247
3248@table @code
3249@item INCLUDE @var{filename}
3250@kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
3251@cindex including a linker script
3252Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
3253be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
ff5dcc92 3254with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
252b5132
RH
325510 levels deep.
3256
4006703d
NS
3257You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
3258@code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
3259
252b5132
RH
3260@item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3261@itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3262@kindex INPUT(@var{files})
3263@cindex input files in linker scripts
3264@cindex input object files in linker scripts
3265@cindex linker script input object files
3266The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
3267in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
3268
3269For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
3270a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
3271then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
3272
3273In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
3274script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
3275
e3f2db7f
AO
3276In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
3277with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
3278located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
3279for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
3280open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
cad60a33
HPN
3281linker will search through the archive library search path.
3282The @dfn{sysroot prefix} can also be forced by specifying @code{=}
3283as the first character in the filename path. See also the
e3f2db7f 3284description of @samp{-L} in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
252b5132 3285
ff5dcc92 3286If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
252b5132
RH
3287name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command line argument
3288@samp{-l}.
3289
3290When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
3291files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
3292script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
3293
3294@item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3295@itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3296@kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3297@cindex grouping input files
3298The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3299files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3300new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
3301in @ref{Options,,Command Line Options}.
3302
b717d30e
JJ
3303@item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3304@itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3305@kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3306This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3307commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3308as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3309with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3310when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3311@option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3312and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3313setting afterwards.
3314
252b5132
RH
3315@item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3316@kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
b45619c0 3317@cindex output file name in linker script
252b5132
RH
3318The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3319@code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3320@samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
3321Line Options}). If both are used, the command line option takes
3322precedence.
3323
3324You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3325output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3326
3327@item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3328@kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3329@cindex library search path in linker script
3330@cindex archive search path in linker script
3331@cindex search path in linker script
3332The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
ff5dcc92 3333@command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
252b5132
RH
3334@code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
3335on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both
3336are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
3337the command line option are searched first.
3338
3339@item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3340@kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3341@cindex first input file
3342The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3343that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3344though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3345when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3346first file.
3347@end table
3348
3349@ifclear SingleFormat
3350@node Format Commands
36f63dca 3351@subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
252b5132
RH
3352A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3353
3354@table @code
3355@item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3356@itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3357@kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3358@cindex output file format in linker script
3359The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3360output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
024531e2 3361exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
252b5132
RH
3362(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If both are used, the command
3363line option takes precedence.
3364
3365You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
3366formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command line options.
3367This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3368desired endianness.
3369
3370If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3371will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3372output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3373used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3374
3375For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3376command:
3377@smallexample
3378OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3379@end smallexample
3380This says that the default format for the output file is
3381@samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command line
3382option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3383format.
3384
3385@item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3386@kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3387@cindex input file format in linker script
3388The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3389files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3390This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3391(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
3392is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3393command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3394@end table
3395@end ifclear
3396
4a93e180
NC
3397@node REGION_ALIAS
3398@subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3399@kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3400@cindex region alias
3401@cindex region names
3402
3403Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3404@ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3405
3406@smallexample
3407REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3408@end smallexample
3409
3410The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3411memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3412to memory regions. An example follows.
3413
3414Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3415memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3416that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3417non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3418access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3419read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3420sections:
3421
3422@itemize @bullet
3423@item
3424@code{.text} program code;
3425@item
3426@code{.rodata} read-only data;
3427@item
3428@code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3429@item
3430@code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3431@end itemize
3432
3433The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3434part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3435output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3436systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3437@code{C}:
3438@multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3439@item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
9d5777a3 3440@item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
4a93e180
NC
3441@item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3442@item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3443@item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3444@end multitable
3445The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3446loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3447the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3448the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3449
3450The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3451includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3452memory layout:
3453@smallexample
3454INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3455
3456SECTIONS
3457 @{
3458 .text :
3459 @{
3460 *(.text)
3461 @} > REGION_TEXT
3462 .rodata :
3463 @{
3464 *(.rodata)
3465 rodata_end = .;
3466 @} > REGION_RODATA
3467 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3468 @{
3469 data_start = .;
3470 *(.data)
3471 @} > REGION_DATA
3472 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3473 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3474 .bss :
3475 @{
3476 *(.bss)
3477 @} > REGION_BSS
3478 @}
3479@end smallexample
3480
3481Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3482regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3483variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3484@table @code
3485@item A
3486Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3487@smallexample
3488MEMORY
3489 @{
3490 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3491 @}
3492
3493REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3494REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3495REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3496REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3497@end smallexample
3498@item B
3499Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3500into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3501@code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3502@smallexample
3503MEMORY
3504 @{
3505 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3506 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3507 @}
3508
3509REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3510REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3511REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3512REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3513@end smallexample
3514@item C
3515Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3516@code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3517initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3518system start into the @code{RAM}.
3519@smallexample
3520MEMORY
3521 @{
3522 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3523 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3524 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3525 @}
3526
3527REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3528REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3529REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3530REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3531@end smallexample
3532@end table
3533
3534It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3535@code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3536necessary:
3537@smallexample
3538#include <string.h>
3539
3540extern char data_start [];
3541extern char data_size [];
3542extern char data_load_start [];
3543
3544void copy_data(void)
3545@{
3546 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3547 @{
3548 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3549 @}
3550@}
3551@end smallexample
3552
252b5132 3553@node Miscellaneous Commands
36f63dca 3554@subsection Other Linker Script Commands
252b5132
RH
3555There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3556
3557@table @code
3558@item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3559@kindex ASSERT
3560@cindex assertion in linker script
3561Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3562with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3563
fd1c4238
NC
3564Note that assertions are checked before the final stages of linking
3565take place. This means that expressions involving symbols PROVIDEd
3566inside section definitions will fail if the user has not set values
3567for those symbols. The only exception to this rule is PROVIDEd
3568symbols that just reference dot. Thus an assertion like this:
3569
3570@smallexample
3571 .stack :
3572 @{
3573 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3574 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3575 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3576 @}
3577@end smallexample
3578
3579will fail if @code{__stack_size} is not defined elsewhere. Symbols
3580PROVIDEd outside of section definitions are evaluated earlier, so they
3581can be used inside ASSERTions. Thus:
3582
3583@smallexample
3584 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3585 .stack :
3586 @{
3587 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3588 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3589 @}
3590@end smallexample
3591
3592will work.
3593
252b5132
RH
3594@item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3595@kindex EXTERN
3596@cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3597Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3598symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3599modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3600each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3601command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3602
3603@item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3604@kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3605@cindex common allocation in linker script
3606This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
ff5dcc92 3607to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
252b5132
RH
3608output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3609
4818e05f
AM
3610@item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3611@kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3612@cindex common allocation in linker script
3613This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3614command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3615to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3616
53d25da6
AM
3617@item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3618@kindex INSERT
3619@cindex insert user script into default script
3620This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3621augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3622inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3623@var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3624default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3625sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3626linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3627insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3628linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3629default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3630of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3631to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3632is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3633
3634@smallexample
3635SECTIONS
3636@{
3637 OVERLAY :
3638 @{
3639 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3640 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3641 @}
3642@}
3643INSERT AFTER .text;
3644@end smallexample
3645
252b5132
RH
3646@item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3647@kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3648@cindex cross references
ff5dcc92 3649This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
252b5132
RH
3650references among certain output sections.
3651
3652In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3653using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3654will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3655errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3656a function defined in the other section.
3657
3658The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
ff5dcc92 3659@command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
252b5132
RH
3660an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3661@code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3662names.
3663
3664@ifclear SingleFormat
3665@item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3666@kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3667@cindex machine architecture
3668@cindex architecture
3669Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3670of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3671architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3672the @samp{-f} option.
3673@end ifclear
01554a74
AM
3674
3675@item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3676@kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3677This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
3678@var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
3679in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
3680@xref{Expression Section}.
252b5132
RH
3681@end table
3682
3683@node Assignments
3684@section Assigning Values to Symbols
3685@cindex assignment in scripts
3686@cindex symbol definition, scripts
3687@cindex variables, defining
3688You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
73ae6183 3689the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
252b5132
RH
3690
3691@menu
3692* Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
eb8476a6 3693* HIDDEN:: HIDDEN
252b5132 3694* PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
7af8e998 3695* PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
73ae6183 3696* Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
252b5132
RH
3697@end menu
3698
3699@node Simple Assignments
3700@subsection Simple Assignments
3701
3702You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3703
3704@table @code
3705@item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3706@itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3707@itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3708@itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
3709@itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
3710@itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
3711@itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
3712@itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
3713@itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
3714@end table
3715
3716The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
3717@var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
3718defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
3719
3720The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
b5666f2f 3721may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
252b5132
RH
3722
3723The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
3724
3725Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
3726
3727You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
3728statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
3729section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
3730
3731The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
3732expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
3733
3734Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
3735assignments may be used:
3736
3737@smallexample
3738floating_point = 0;
3739SECTIONS
3740@{
3741 .text :
3742 @{
3743 *(.text)
3744 _etext = .;
3745 @}
156e34dd 3746 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
252b5132
RH
3747 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3748@}
3749@end smallexample
3750@noindent
3751In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
3752zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
3753the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
3754defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
3755upward to a 4 byte boundary.
3756
eb8476a6
MR
3757@node HIDDEN
3758@subsection HIDDEN
3759@cindex HIDDEN
3760For ELF targeted ports, define a symbol that will be hidden and won't be
3761exported. The syntax is @code{HIDDEN(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3762
3763Here is the example from @ref{Simple Assignments}, rewritten to use
3764@code{HIDDEN}:
3765
3766@smallexample
3767HIDDEN(floating_point = 0);
3768SECTIONS
3769@{
3770 .text :
3771 @{
3772 *(.text)
3773 HIDDEN(_etext = .);
3774 @}
3775 HIDDEN(_bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3);
3776 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3777@}
3778@end smallexample
3779@noindent
3780In this case none of the three symbols will be visible outside this module.
3781
252b5132
RH
3782@node PROVIDE
3783@subsection PROVIDE
3784@cindex PROVIDE
3785In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
3786only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
3787the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
3788@samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
3789@samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
3790@code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
3791@samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
3792@code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
3793
3794Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
3795@smallexample
3796SECTIONS
3797@{
3798 .text :
3799 @{
3800 *(.text)
3801 _etext = .;
3802 PROVIDE(etext = .);
3803 @}
3804@}
3805@end smallexample
3806
3807In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
3808underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
3809the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
3810underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
3811If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
3812linker will use the definition in the linker script.
3813
7af8e998
L
3814@node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3815@subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3816@cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3817Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
3818hidden and won't be exported.
3819
73ae6183
NC
3820@node Source Code Reference
3821@subsection Source Code Reference
3822
3823Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
3824intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
3825a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
3826symbol that does not have a value.
3827
3828Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
3829transform names in the source code into different names when they are
3830stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
3831prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
3832mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
3833of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
3834variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
3835linker script variable might be referred to as:
3836
3837@smallexample
3838 extern int foo;
3839@end smallexample
3840
3841But in the linker script it might be defined as:
3842
3843@smallexample
3844 _foo = 1000;
3845@end smallexample
3846
3847In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
3848transformation has taken place.
3849
3850When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
3851things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
3852in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
3853second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
3854table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
3855contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
3856value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
3857
3858@smallexample
3859 int foo = 1000;
3860@end smallexample
3861
10bf6894 3862creates an entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
73ae6183
NC
3863holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
3864number 1000 is initially stored.
3865
3866When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
3867first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
3868memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
3869So:
3870
3871@smallexample
3872 foo = 1;
3873@end smallexample
3874
3875looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
3876associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
3877address. Whereas:
3878
3879@smallexample
3880 int * a = & foo;
3881@end smallexample
3882
10bf6894 3883looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets its address
73ae6183
NC
3884and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
3885the variable @samp{a}.
3886
3887Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
3888the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
3889an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
3890
3891@smallexample
3892 foo = 1000;
3893@end smallexample
3894
3895creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
3896the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
3897address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
3898linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
3899access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
3900
3901Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
3902you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
3903use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
3904section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
3905linker script contains these declarations:
3906
3907@smallexample
3908@group
3909 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
a5e406b5 3910 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM);
73ae6183
NC
3911 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
3912@end group
3913@end smallexample
3914
3915Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
3916
3917@smallexample
3918@group
3919 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
c0065db7 3920
73ae6183
NC
3921 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
3922@end group
3923@end smallexample
3924
3925Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
5707d2ad
NC
3926Alternatively the symbols can be treated as the names of vectors or
3927arrays and then the code will again work as expected:
3928
3929@smallexample
3930@group
3931 extern char start_of_ROM[], end_of_ROM[], start_of_FLASH[];
3932
3933 memcpy (start_of_FLASH, start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM - start_of_ROM);
3934@end group
3935@end smallexample
3936
3937Note how using this method does not require the use of @samp{&}
3938operators.
73ae6183 3939
252b5132 3940@node SECTIONS
36f63dca 3941@section SECTIONS Command
252b5132
RH
3942@kindex SECTIONS
3943The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
3944into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
3945
3946The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
3947@smallexample
3948SECTIONS
3949@{
3950 @var{sections-command}
3951 @var{sections-command}
3952 @dots{}
3953@}
3954@end smallexample
3955
3956Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
3957
3958@itemize @bullet
3959@item
3960an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
3961@item
3962a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
3963@item
3964an output section description
3965@item
3966an overlay description
3967@end itemize
3968
3969The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
3970@code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
3971those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
3972understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
3973the layout of the output file.
3974
3975Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
3976below.
3977
3978If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
3979linker will place each input section into an identically named output
3980section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
3981input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
3982example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
3983in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
3984
3985@menu
3986* Output Section Description:: Output section description
3987* Output Section Name:: Output section name
3988* Output Section Address:: Output section address
3989* Input Section:: Input section description
3990* Output Section Data:: Output section data
3991* Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
3992* Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
3993* Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
3994* Overlay Description:: Overlay description
3995@end menu
3996
3997@node Output Section Description
36f63dca 3998@subsection Output Section Description
252b5132
RH
3999The full description of an output section looks like this:
4000@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 4001@group
7e7d5768 4002@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759 4003 [AT(@var{lma})]
1eec346e 4004 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
0c71d759
NC
4005 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4006 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
4007 @{
4008 @var{output-section-command}
4009 @var{output-section-command}
4010 @dots{}
abc9061b 4011 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}] [,]
252b5132
RH
4012@end group
4013@end smallexample
4014
4015Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
4016
4017The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
4018name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
abc9061b
CC
4019The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fillexp} is used and
4020the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
252b5132
RH
4021The line breaks and other white space are optional.
4022
4023Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
4024
4025@itemize @bullet
4026@item
4027a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4028@item
4029an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
4030@item
4031data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
4032@item
4033a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
4034@end itemize
4035
4036@node Output Section Name
36f63dca 4037@subsection Output Section Name
252b5132
RH
4038@cindex name, section
4039@cindex section name
4040The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
4041meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
4042support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
4043must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
4044example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
4045output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
4046names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
4047quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
4048characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
4049commas must be quoted.
4050
4051The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
4052Discarding}.
4053
4054@node Output Section Address
2a16d82a 4055@subsection Output Section Address
252b5132
RH
4056@cindex address, section
4057@cindex section address
4058The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
ea5cae92
NC
4059address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
4060is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
4061
4062If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
4063section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
4064to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
4065alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
4066contained within the output section.
4067
4068The output section address heuristic is as follows:
4069
4070@itemize @bullet
4071@item
4072If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
4073is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
4074in that region.
4075
4076@item
4077If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
4078regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
4079section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
4080be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
4081
4082@item
4083If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
4084the output address will be based on the current value of the location
4085counter.
4086@end itemize
4087
4088@noindent
4089For example:
4090
252b5132
RH
4091@smallexample
4092.text . : @{ *(.text) @}
4093@end smallexample
ea5cae92 4094
252b5132
RH
4095@noindent
4096and
ea5cae92 4097
252b5132
RH
4098@smallexample
4099.text : @{ *(.text) @}
4100@end smallexample
ea5cae92 4101
252b5132
RH
4102@noindent
4103are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
4104@samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
4105counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
ea5cae92
NC
4106counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
4107input sections.
252b5132
RH
4108
4109The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
4110For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
4111so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
4112do something like this:
4113@smallexample
4114.text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
4115@end smallexample
4116@noindent
4117This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
4118aligned upward to the specified value.
4119
4120Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
6ce340f1
NC
4121location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
4122sections are ignored).
252b5132
RH
4123
4124@node Input Section
36f63dca 4125@subsection Input Section Description
252b5132
RH
4126@cindex input sections
4127@cindex mapping input sections to output sections
4128The most common output section command is an input section description.
4129
4130The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
4131You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
4132in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
4133map the input files into your memory layout.
4134
4135@menu
4136* Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
4137* Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
4138* Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
4139* Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
4140* Input Section Example:: Input section example
4141@end menu
4142
4143@node Input Section Basics
36f63dca 4144@subsubsection Input Section Basics
252b5132
RH
4145@cindex input section basics
4146An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
4147by a list of section names in parentheses.
4148
4149The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
4150describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
4151
4152The most common input section description is to include all input
4153sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
4154include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
4155@smallexample
4156*(.text)
4157@end smallexample
4158@noindent
18625d54
CM
4159Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
4160of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
4161match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
4162example:
252b5132 4163@smallexample
b4346c09 4164*(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
252b5132 4165@end smallexample
765b7cbe
JB
4166will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o} and
4167@file{otherfile.o} to be included.
252b5132
RH
4168
4169There are two ways to include more than one section:
4170@smallexample
4171*(.text .rdata)
4172*(.text) *(.rdata)
4173@end smallexample
4174@noindent
4175The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
4176@samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
b6bf44ba
AM
4177first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
4178they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
252b5132
RH
4179@samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
4180@samp{.rdata} input sections.
4181
4182You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
4183You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
4184needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
4185@smallexample
4186data.o(.data)
4187@end smallexample
4188
ae17ab41
CM
4189To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
4190of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
4191
4192Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF sections:
4193
4194@smallexample
4195@group
4196SECTIONS @{
4197 .text : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) @}
4198 .text2 : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) @}
4199@}
4200@end group
4201@end smallexample
4202
4203In this example, the output section @samp{.text} will be comprised of any
4204input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
4205@code{SHF_MERGE} and @code{SHF_STRINGS} are set. The output section
4206@samp{.text2} will be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text)
4207whose section header flag @code{SHF_WRITE} is clear.
4208
967928e9
AM
4209You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
4210matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
4211with no whitespace around the colon.
4212
4213@table @samp
4214@item archive:file
4215matches file within archive
4216@item archive:
4217matches the whole archive
4218@item :file
4219matches file but not one in an archive
4220@end table
4221
4222Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
4223wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
4224single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
4225@samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
4226within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
4227also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
4228other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
4229from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
4230command.
4231
252b5132
RH
4232If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
4233the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
4234commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
4235@smallexample
4236data.o
4237@end smallexample
4238
967928e9
AM
4239When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
4240and does not contain any wild card
252b5132
RH
4241characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
4242name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
4243did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
4244though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
4245@code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
4246the archive search path.
4247
4248@node Input Section Wildcards
36f63dca 4249@subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
252b5132
RH
4250@cindex input section wildcards
4251@cindex wildcard file name patterns
4252@cindex file name wildcard patterns
4253@cindex section name wildcard patterns
4254In an input section description, either the file name or the section
4255name or both may be wildcard patterns.
4256
4257The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
4258pattern for the file name.
4259
4260The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
4261
4262@table @samp
4263@item *
4264matches any number of characters
4265@item ?
4266matches any single character
4267@item [@var{chars}]
4268matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
4269character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
4270@samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
4271@item \
4272quotes the following character
4273@end table
4274
4275When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
4276will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
4277Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
4278exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
4279@samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
4280a @samp{/} character.
4281
4282File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
4283specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
4284does not search directories to expand wildcards.
4285
4286If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
4287appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
4288will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
4289sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
4290@file{data.o} rule will not be used:
4291@smallexample
4292.data : @{ *(.data) @}
4293.data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
4294@end smallexample
4295
bcaa7b3e 4296@cindex SORT_BY_NAME
252b5132
RH
4297Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
4298in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
bcaa7b3e
L
4299this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
4300pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
4301@code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
252b5132
RH
4302into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
4303
bcaa7b3e
L
4304@cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
4305@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4306difference is @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into
1ae5c3ae 4307descending order by alignment before placing them in the output file.
ee83b8a6
NC
4308Larger alignments are placed before smaller alignments in order to
4309reduce the amount of padding necessary.
bcaa7b3e 4310
02ecc8e9
L
4311@cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
4312@code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is very similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}. The
4313difference is @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into
4314ascending order by numerical value of the GCC init_priority attribute
4315encoded in the section name before placing them in the output file.
4316
bcaa7b3e
L
4317@cindex SORT
4318@code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4319
4320When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
4321can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
4322
4323@enumerate
4324@item
4325@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
1ae5c3ae 4326It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if two
bcaa7b3e
L
4327sections have the same name.
4328@item
4329@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
1ae5c3ae 4330It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if two
bcaa7b3e
L
4331sections have the same alignment.
4332@item
c0065db7 4333@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
bcaa7b3e
L
4334treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
4335@item
4336@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
4337is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
4338@item
4339All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
4340@end enumerate
4341
4342When both command line section sorting option and linker script
4343section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
4344takes precedence over the command line option.
4345
4346If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
4347command line option will make the section sorting command to be
4348treated as nested sorting command.
4349
4350@enumerate
4351@item
4352@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
4353@option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
4354@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4355@item
4356@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
4357@option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
4358@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4359@end enumerate
4360
4361If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
4362command line option will be ignored.
4363
eda680f8
L
4364@cindex SORT_NONE
4365@code{SORT_NONE} disables section sorting by ignoring the command line
4366section sorting option.
4367
252b5132
RH
4368If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
4369@samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
4370precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
4371
4372This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
4373files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
4374sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
4375The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
4376with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
4377linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
4378@smallexample
4379@group
4380SECTIONS @{
4381 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4382 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
4383 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4384 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
4385@}
4386@end group
4387@end smallexample
4388
4389@node Input Section Common
36f63dca 4390@subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
252b5132
RH
4391@cindex common symbol placement
4392@cindex uninitialized data placement
4393A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4394file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
4395linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4396named @samp{COMMON}.
4397
4398You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4399other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
4400particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4401input files are placed in another section.
4402
4403In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4404@samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4405@smallexample
4406.bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4407@end smallexample
4408
4409@cindex scommon section
4410@cindex small common symbols
4411Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4412example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4413symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4414different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4415the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4416symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4417to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4418locations.
4419
4420@cindex [COMMON]
4421You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4422notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4423@samp{*(COMMON)}.
4424
4425@node Input Section Keep
36f63dca 4426@subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
252b5132
RH
4427@cindex KEEP
4428@cindex garbage collection
4429When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
a1ab1d2a 4430it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
252b5132
RH
4431This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4432with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
bcaa7b3e 4433@code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
252b5132
RH
4434
4435@node Input Section Example
36f63dca 4436@subsubsection Input Section Example
252b5132
RH
4437The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4438to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4439start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4440@samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4441follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4442@samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4443@samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4444All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4445files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4446
4447@smallexample
4448@group
4449SECTIONS @{
4450 outputa 0x10000 :
4451 @{
4452 all.o
4453 foo.o (.input1)
4454 @}
36f63dca
NC
4455@end group
4456@group
252b5132
RH
4457 outputb :
4458 @{
4459 foo.o (.input2)
4460 foo1.o (.input1)
4461 @}
36f63dca
NC
4462@end group
4463@group
252b5132
RH
4464 outputc :
4465 @{
4466 *(.input1)
4467 *(.input2)
4468 @}
4469@}
4470@end group
a1ab1d2a 4471@end smallexample
252b5132
RH
4472
4473@node Output Section Data
36f63dca 4474@subsection Output Section Data
252b5132
RH
4475@cindex data
4476@cindex section data
4477@cindex output section data
4478@kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4479@kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4480@kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4481@kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4482@kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4483You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4484@code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4485an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4486parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4487value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4488counter.
4489
4490The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4491store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4492bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4493stored.
4494
4495For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4496of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4497@smallexample
4498BYTE(1)
4499LONG(addr)
4500@end smallexample
4501
4502When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4503same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4504target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4505@code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4506@code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4507
4508If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4509which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4510When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4511true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4512endianness of the first input object file.
4513
36f63dca 4514Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
2b5fc1f5
NC
4515between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4516@smallexample
4517SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4518@end smallexample
4519whereas this will work:
4520@smallexample
4521SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4522@end smallexample
4523
252b5132
RH
4524@kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4525@cindex holes, filling
4526@cindex unspecified memory
4527You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4528current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4529otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4530gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
a139d329 4531with the value of the expression, repeated as
252b5132
RH
4532necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4533point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4534than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4535different parts of an output section.
4536
4537This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
563e308f 4538value @samp{0x90}:
252b5132 4539@smallexample
563e308f 4540FILL(0x90909090)
252b5132
RH
4541@end smallexample
4542
4543The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
9673c93c 4544section attribute, but it only affects the
252b5132
RH
4545part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4546entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
9673c93c 4547precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
a139d329 4548expression.
252b5132
RH
4549
4550@node Output Section Keywords
36f63dca 4551@subsection Output Section Keywords
252b5132
RH
4552There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4553commands.
4554
4555@table @code
4556@kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4557@cindex input filename symbols
4558@cindex filename symbols
4559@item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4560The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4561The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4562file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4563the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4564
4565This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4566normally used for any other object file format.
4567
4568@kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4569@cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4570@cindex constructors, arranging in link
4571@item CONSTRUCTORS
4572When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4573unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4574destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4575arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4576automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4577For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4578linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4579@code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4580ignored for other object file formats.
4581
4582The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
7e69709c
AM
4583constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4584Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4585the start and end of the global destructors. The
252b5132
RH
4586first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4587of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4588compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4589formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4590@code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4591the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4592destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4593@code{exit}.
4594
4595For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4596arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4597addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4598and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4599linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4600runtime code expects to see.
4601
4602@smallexample
4603 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4604 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4605 *(.ctors)
4606 LONG(0)
4607 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4608 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4609 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4610 *(.dtors)
4611 LONG(0)
4612 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4613@end smallexample
4614
4615If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4616which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4617are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4618are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
bcaa7b3e
L
4619command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4620@code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4621@samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
252b5132
RH
4622@samp{*(.dtors)}.
4623
4624Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4625and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4626need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4627scripts.
4628
4629@end table
4630
4631@node Output Section Discarding
36f63dca 4632@subsection Output Section Discarding
252b5132
RH
4633@cindex discarding sections
4634@cindex sections, discarding
4635@cindex removing sections
2edab91c
AM
4636The linker will not normally create output sections with no contents.
4637This is for convenience when referring to input sections that may or
4638may not be present in any of the input files. For example:
252b5132 4639@smallexample
49c13adb 4640.foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
252b5132
RH
4641@end smallexample
4642@noindent
4643will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
74541ad4
AM
4644@samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4645sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
2edab91c
AM
4646space in an output section will also create the output section. So
4647too will assignments to dot even if the assignment does not create
4648space, except for @samp{. = 0}, @samp{. = . + 0}, @samp{. = sym},
4649@samp{. = . + sym} and @samp{. = ALIGN (. != 0, expr, 1)} when
4650@samp{sym} is an absolute symbol of value 0 defined in the script.
4651This allows you to force output of an empty section with @samp{. = .}.
74541ad4 4652
a0976ea4 4653The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
74541ad4
AM
4654on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4655symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
a0976ea4
AM
4656the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4657section is discarded.
252b5132
RH
4658
4659@cindex /DISCARD/
4660The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
4661input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
4662section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
4663
4664@node Output Section Attributes
36f63dca 4665@subsection Output Section Attributes
252b5132
RH
4666@cindex output section attributes
4667We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
4668like this:
0c71d759 4669
252b5132 4670@smallexample
a1ab1d2a 4671@group
7e7d5768 4672@var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
0c71d759
NC
4673 [AT(@var{lma})]
4674 [ALIGN(@var{section_align})]
4675 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4676 [@var{constraint}]
252b5132
RH
4677 @{
4678 @var{output-section-command}
4679 @var{output-section-command}
4680 @dots{}
562d3460 4681 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
252b5132
RH
4682@end group
4683@end smallexample
0c71d759 4684
252b5132
RH
4685We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
4686@var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
4687remaining section attributes.
4688
a1ab1d2a 4689@menu
252b5132
RH
4690* Output Section Type:: Output section type
4691* Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
bbf115d3 4692* Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
7e7d5768 4693* Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
0c71d759 4694* Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
252b5132
RH
4695* Output Section Region:: Output section region
4696* Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
4697* Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
4698@end menu
4699
4700@node Output Section Type
36f63dca 4701@subsubsection Output Section Type
252b5132
RH
4702Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
4703parentheses. The following types are defined:
4704
4705@table @code
4706@item NOLOAD
4707The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
4708loaded into memory when the program is run.
4709@item DSECT
4710@itemx COPY
4711@itemx INFO
4712@itemx OVERLAY
4713These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
4714rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
4715marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
4716section when the program is run.
4717@end table
4718
4719@kindex NOLOAD
4720@cindex prevent unnecessary loading
4721@cindex loading, preventing
4722The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
4723the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
4724the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
4725@samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
2e76e85a 4726need to be loaded when the program is run.
252b5132
RH
4727@smallexample
4728@group
4729SECTIONS @{
4730 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
4731 @dots{}
4732@}
4733@end group
4734@end smallexample
4735
4736@node Output Section LMA
36f63dca 4737@subsubsection Output Section LMA
562d3460 4738@kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
252b5132
RH
4739@kindex AT(@var{lma})
4740@cindex load address
4741@cindex section load address
4742Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
ea5cae92
NC
4743@ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
4744@pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
4745specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
4746address is optional.
6bdafbeb 4747
ea5cae92
NC
4748The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
4749specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
4750takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
4751load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
4752region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
dc0b6aa0
AM
4753
4754If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
ea5cae92
NC
4755section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
4756load address:
4757
4758@itemize @bullet
4759@item
4760If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
4761the LMA address as well.
4762
4763@item
4764If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
4765
4766@item
4767Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
4768with the current section, and this region contains at least one
4769section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
4770VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
4771the last section in the located region.
4772
4773@item
4774If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
4775that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
4776
4777@item
4778If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
4779section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
4780@end itemize
252b5132
RH
4781
4782@cindex ROM initialized data
4783@cindex initialized data in ROM
4784This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
4785example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
4786called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
4787@samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
4788even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
4789uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
4790defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
4791counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
4792
4793@smallexample
4794@group
4795SECTIONS
4796 @{
4797 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
a1ab1d2a 4798 .mdata 0x2000 :
252b5132
RH
4799 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
4800 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
4801 .bss 0x3000 :
4802 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
4803@}
4804@end group
4805@end smallexample
4806
4807The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
4808this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
4809the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
4810how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
4811script.
4812
4813@smallexample
4814@group
4815extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
4816char *src = &_etext;
4817char *dst = &_data;
4818
ea5cae92
NC
4819/* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
4820while (dst < &_edata)
252b5132 4821 *dst++ = *src++;
252b5132 4822
ea5cae92 4823/* Zero bss. */
252b5132
RH
4824for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
4825 *dst = 0;
4826@end group
4827@end smallexample
4828
bbf115d3
L
4829@node Forced Output Alignment
4830@subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
4831@kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
4832@cindex forcing output section alignment
4833@cindex output section alignment
1eec346e 4834You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN. As an
13075d04
SH
4835alternative you can enforce that the difference between the VMA and LMA remains
4836intact throughout this output section with the ALIGN_WITH_INPUT attribute.
bbf115d3 4837
7e7d5768
AM
4838@node Forced Input Alignment
4839@subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
4840@kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
4841@cindex forcing input section alignment
4842@cindex input section alignment
4843You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
4844SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
4845sections, whether larger or smaller.
4846
0c71d759
NC
4847@node Output Section Constraint
4848@subsubsection Output Section Constraint
4849@kindex ONLY_IF_RO
4850@kindex ONLY_IF_RW
4851@cindex constraints on output sections
4852You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
4853of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
4854read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
4855@code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
4856
252b5132 4857@node Output Section Region
36f63dca 4858@subsubsection Output Section Region
252b5132
RH
4859@kindex >@var{region}
4860@cindex section, assigning to memory region
4861@cindex memory regions and sections
4862You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
4863using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
4864
4865Here is a simple example:
4866@smallexample
4867@group
4868MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
4869SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
4870@end group
4871@end smallexample
4872
4873@node Output Section Phdr
36f63dca 4874@subsubsection Output Section Phdr
252b5132
RH
4875@kindex :@var{phdr}
4876@cindex section, assigning to program header
4877@cindex program headers and sections
4878You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
4879using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
4880one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
4881assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
4882@code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
4883linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
4884
4885Here is a simple example:
4886@smallexample
4887@group
4888PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
4889SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
4890@end group
4891@end smallexample
4892
4893@node Output Section Fill
36f63dca 4894@subsubsection Output Section Fill
252b5132
RH
4895@kindex =@var{fillexp}
4896@cindex section fill pattern
4897@cindex fill pattern, entire section
4898You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
4899@samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
4900(@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
4901within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
a139d329
AM
4902alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
4903necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
9673c93c 4904of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
a139d329
AM
4905an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
4906fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
9673c93c 4907other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
a139d329
AM
4908pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
4909expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
252b5132
RH
4910
4911You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
9673c93c 4912output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
252b5132
RH
4913
4914Here is a simple example:
4915@smallexample
4916@group
563e308f 4917SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
252b5132
RH
4918@end group
4919@end smallexample
4920
4921@node Overlay Description
36f63dca 4922@subsection Overlay Description
252b5132
RH
4923@kindex OVERLAY
4924@cindex overlays
4925An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
4926are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
4927the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
4928copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
4929required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
4930can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
4931than another.
4932
4933Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
4934@code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
4935output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
4936command is as follows:
4937@smallexample
4938@group
4939OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
4940 @{
4941 @var{secname1}
4942 @{
4943 @var{output-section-command}
4944 @var{output-section-command}
4945 @dots{}
4946 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4947 @var{secname2}
4948 @{
4949 @var{output-section-command}
4950 @var{output-section-command}
4951 @dots{}
4952 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
4953 @dots{}
abc9061b 4954 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}] [,]
252b5132
RH
4955@end group
4956@end smallexample
4957
4958Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
4959section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
4960section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
11e7fd74 4961those within the general @code{SECTIONS} construct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
252b5132
RH
4962except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
4963sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
4964
abc9061b
CC
4965The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fill} is used and
4966the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
4967
252b5132
RH
4968The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
4969addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
4970memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
4971whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
4972and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
4973and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
4974
56dd11f0
NC
4975If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there are any
4976references among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since
4977the sections all run at the same address, it normally does not make
4978sense for one section to refer directly to another.
4979@xref{Miscellaneous Commands, NOCROSSREFS}.
252b5132
RH
4980
4981For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
34711ca3 4982provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
252b5132
RH
4983defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
4984@code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
4985the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
4986within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
4987symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
4988
4989At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
4990the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
4991
4992Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
4993@code{SECTIONS} construct.
4994@smallexample
4995@group
4996 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
4997 @{
4998 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
4999 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
5000 @}
5001@end group
5002@end smallexample
5003@noindent
5004This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
5005address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
5006@samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
34711ca3 5007following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
252b5132
RH
5008@code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
5009@code{__load_stop_text1}.
5010
5011C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
5012like the following.
5013
5014@smallexample
5015@group
5016 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
5017 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
5018 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
5019@end group
5020@end smallexample
5021
5022Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
5023everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
5024example could have been written identically as follows.
5025
5026@smallexample
5027@group
5028 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
5029 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
5030 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
252b5132 5031 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
34711ca3
AM
5032 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
5033 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
252b5132
RH
5034 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
5035@end group
5036@end smallexample
5037
5038@node MEMORY
36f63dca 5039@section MEMORY Command
252b5132
RH
5040@kindex MEMORY
5041@cindex memory regions
5042@cindex regions of memory
5043@cindex allocating memory
5044@cindex discontinuous memory
5045The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
5046memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
5047
5048The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
5049memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
5050may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
5051can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
5052set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
5053regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
5054around to fit into the available regions.
5055
127fcdff
AB
5056A linker script may contain many uses of the @code{MEMORY} command,
5057however, all memory blocks defined are treated as if they were
5058specified inside a single @code{MEMORY} command. The syntax for
5059@code{MEMORY} is:
252b5132
RH
5060@smallexample
5061@group
a1ab1d2a 5062MEMORY
252b5132
RH
5063 @{
5064 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
5065 @dots{}
5066 @}
5067@end group
5068@end smallexample
5069
5070The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
5071region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
5072Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5073with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
4a93e180
NC
5074must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
5075add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
9d5777a3 5076command.
252b5132
RH
5077
5078@cindex memory region attributes
5079The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
5080whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
5081not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
5082@ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
5083section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
5084the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
5085them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
5086
5087The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
5088@table @samp
5089@item R
5090Read-only section
5091@item W
5092Read/write section
5093@item X
5094Executable section
5095@item A
5096Allocatable section
5097@item I
5098Initialized section
5099@item L
5100Same as @samp{I}
5101@item !
c09e9a8c 5102Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
252b5132
RH
5103@end table
5104
5105If a unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
5106@samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
5107attribute reverses this test, so that an unmapped section will be placed
5108in the memory region only if it does not match any of the listed
5109attributes.
5110
5111@kindex ORIGIN =
5112@kindex o =
5113@kindex org =
9cd6d51a
NC
5114The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
5115the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
5116cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
5117abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
5118@code{ORG}).
252b5132
RH
5119
5120@kindex LENGTH =
5121@kindex len =
5122@kindex l =
5123The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
5124region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
9cd6d51a
NC
5125be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
5126@code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
252b5132
RH
5127
5128In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
5129available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
5130and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
5131linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
5132is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
5133or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
5134explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
5135region.
5136
5137@smallexample
5138@group
a1ab1d2a 5139MEMORY
252b5132
RH
5140 @{
5141 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
5142 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
5143 @}
5144@end group
5145@end smallexample
5146
5147Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
5148specific output sections into that memory region by using the
5149@samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
5150a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
5151output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
5152was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
5153the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
5154output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
5155region, the linker will issue an error message.
5156
3ec57632 5157It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
c0065db7 5158expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
3ec57632
NC
5159@code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
5160
5161@smallexample
5162@group
c0065db7 5163 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
3ec57632
NC
5164@end group
5165@end smallexample
5166
252b5132
RH
5167@node PHDRS
5168@section PHDRS Command
5169@kindex PHDRS
5170@cindex program headers
5171@cindex ELF program headers
5172@cindex program segments
5173@cindex segments, ELF
5174The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
5175@dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
5176loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
5177program with the @samp{-p} option.
5178
5179When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
5180reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
5181program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
5182This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
5183interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
5184
5185The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
5186in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
5187precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
5188the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
5189not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
5190
5191The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
5192generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
5193ignore @code{PHDRS}.
5194
5195This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
5196@code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
5197
5198@smallexample
5199@group
5200PHDRS
5201@{
5202 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
5203 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
5204@}
5205@end group
5206@end smallexample
5207
5208The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
5209of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
5210header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5211with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5c1a3f0f
NS
5212must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
5213is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
252b5132
RH
5214
5215Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
5216system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
5217specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
5218sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
5219attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
5220Section Phdr}.
5221
5222It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
5223merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
5224repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
5225contain the section.
5226
5227If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
5228then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
5229not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
5230convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
5231placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
5232default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
5233segment at all.
5234
5235@kindex FILEHDR
5236@kindex PHDRS
5c1a3f0f 5237You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
252b5132
RH
5238the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
5239The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
5240file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5c1a3f0f 5241include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
4100cea3
AM
5242segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
5243these keywords.
252b5132
RH
5244
5245The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
5246value of the keyword.
5247
5248@table @asis
5249@item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
5250Indicates an unused program header.
5251
5252@item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
5253Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
5254the file.
5255
5256@item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
5257Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
5258
5259@item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
5260Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
5261found.
5262
5263@item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
5264Indicates a segment holding note information.
5265
5266@item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
5267A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
5268ABI.
5269
5270@item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
5271Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
5272
5273@item @var{expression}
5274An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
5275be used for types not defined above.
5276@end table
5277
5278You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
5279in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
5280@code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
5281Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
5282output section attribute.
5283
5284The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
5285which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
5286explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
5287an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
5288header.
5289
5290Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
5291headers used on a native ELF system.
5292
5293@example
5294@group
5295PHDRS
5296@{
5297 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
5298 interp PT_INTERP ;
5299 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
5300 data PT_LOAD ;
5301 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
5302@}
5303
5304SECTIONS
5305@{
5306 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
5307 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
5308 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
5309 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
5310 @dots{}
5311 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
5312 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
5313 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
5314 @dots{}
5315@}
5316@end group
5317@end example
5318
5319@node VERSION
5320@section VERSION Command
5321@kindex VERSION @{script text@}
5322@cindex symbol versions
5323@cindex version script
5324@cindex versions of symbols
5325The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
5326only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
5327symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
5328a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
5329shared library.
5330
5331You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
5332you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
5333also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
5334
5335The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
5336@smallexample
5337VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
5338@end smallexample
5339
5340The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
5341Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
5342version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
5343version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
5344version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
5345scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
5346library.
5347
5348The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
5349examples.
5350
5351@smallexample
5352VERS_1.1 @{
5353 global:
5354 foo1;
5355 local:
a1ab1d2a
UD
5356 old*;
5357 original*;
5358 new*;
252b5132
RH
5359@};
5360
5361VERS_1.2 @{
5362 foo2;
5363@} VERS_1.1;
5364
5365VERS_2.0 @{
5366 bar1; bar2;
c0065db7 5367 extern "C++" @{
86043bbb 5368 ns::*;
bb1515f2
MF
5369 "f(int, double)";
5370 @};
252b5132
RH
5371@} VERS_1.2;
5372@end smallexample
5373
5374This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
5375version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
5376The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
5377a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
313e35ee
AM
5378of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
5379symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
5380is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
5381in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
86043bbb
MM
5382However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
5383name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
252b5132
RH
5384
5385Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
5386depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
5387to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
5388
5389Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
5390depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
5391and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
5392
5393When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
5394specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
5395unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
a981ed6f 5396unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
ae5a3597
AM
5397somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
5398wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
5399wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
5400set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
5401ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
252b5132
RH
5402
5403The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
5404they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
5405could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5406However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5407
0f6bf451 5408Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
6b9b879a
JJ
5409in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5410symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5411won't.
5412
5413@smallexample
7c9c73be 5414@{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
9d201f2f 5415@end smallexample
6b9b879a 5416
252b5132
RH
5417When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5418symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5419requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5420shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5421loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5422linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5423application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5424way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5425all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5426search for each symbol reference.
5427
5428The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5429doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5430that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5431functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5432the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5433required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5434that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5435versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5436the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5437
5438There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5439first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5440source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5441script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5442maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5443@smallexample
5444__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5445@end smallexample
5446@noindent
5447in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5448be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5449The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
96a94295
L
5450@samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5451takes precedence over a version script.
252b5132
RH
5452
5453The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5454function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5455an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5456version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5457linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5458
5459To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5460source file. Here is an example:
5461
5462@smallexample
5463__asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5464__asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5465__asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5466__asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5467@end smallexample
5468
5469In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5470unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5471example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5472@samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5473
5474When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5475some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5476this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5477@samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5478declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5479you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5480
5481If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5482within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
36f63dca 5483(i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
252b5132
RH
5484specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5485
cb840a31
L
5486You can also specify the language in the version script:
5487
5488@smallexample
5489VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5490@end smallexample
5491
c0065db7 5492The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
cb840a31
L
5493The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5494demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
bb1515f2
MF
5495patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5496@samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
cb840a31 5497
86043bbb
MM
5498Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5499described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5500or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5501the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5502whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5503cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5504might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5505should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5506expect when you upgrade.
5507
252b5132
RH
5508@node Expressions
5509@section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5510@cindex expressions
5511@cindex arithmetic
5512The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5513that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5514expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5515host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5516
5517You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5518
5519The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5520expressions.
5521
5522@menu
5523* Constants:: Constants
0c71d759 5524* Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
252b5132 5525* Symbols:: Symbol Names
ecca9871 5526* Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
252b5132
RH
5527* Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5528* Operators:: Operators
5529* Evaluation:: Evaluation
5530* Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5531* Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5532@end menu
5533
5534@node Constants
5535@subsection Constants
5536@cindex integer notation
5537@cindex constants in linker scripts
5538All constants are integers.
5539
5540As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5541octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
8a308ae8 5542hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
11e7fd74 5543@samp{H} for hexadecimal, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
8a308ae8
NC
5544@samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5545value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
252b5132
RH
5546
5547@cindex scaled integers
5548@cindex K and M integer suffixes
5549@cindex M and K integer suffixes
5550@cindex suffixes for integers
5551@cindex integer suffixes
5552In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5553constant by
5554@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5555@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5556@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5557@code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5558@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5559@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5560@tex
5561${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5562@end tex
5563@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
8a308ae8
NC
5564respectively. For example, the following
5565all refer to the same quantity:
5566
252b5132 5567@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5568_fourk_1 = 4K;
5569_fourk_2 = 4096;
5570_fourk_3 = 0x1000;
8a308ae8 5571_fourk_4 = 10000o;
252b5132
RH
5572@end smallexample
5573
8a308ae8
NC
5574Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5575conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5576
0c71d759
NC
5577@node Symbolic Constants
5578@subsection Symbolic Constants
5579@cindex symbolic constants
5580@kindex CONSTANT
5581It is possible to refer to target specific constants via the use of
5582the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5583
5584@table @code
5585@item MAXPAGESIZE
5586@kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5587The target's maximum page size.
5588
5589@item COMMONPAGESIZE
5590@kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5591The target's default page size.
5592@end table
5593
5594So for example:
5595
5596@smallexample
9d5777a3 5597 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
0c71d759
NC
5598@end smallexample
5599
5600will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5601supported by the target.
5602
252b5132
RH
5603@node Symbols
5604@subsection Symbol Names
5605@cindex symbol names
5606@cindex names
5607@cindex quoted symbol names
5608@kindex "
5609Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5610and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5611Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5612specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5613keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5614@smallexample
36f63dca
NC
5615"SECTION" = 9;
5616"with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
252b5132
RH
5617@end smallexample
5618
5619Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5620to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5621whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5622
ecca9871
L
5623@node Orphan Sections
5624@subsection Orphan Sections
5625@cindex orphan
5626Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5627are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5628script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
5629output file, but it has to guess as to where they should be
5630placed. The linker uses a simple heuristic to do this. It
5631attempts to place orphan sections after non-orphan sections of the
5632same attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc.
5633If there is not enough room to do this then it places
5634at the end of the file.
5635
5636For ELF targets, the attribute of the section includes section type as
5637well as section flag.
5638
c005eb9e
AB
5639The command line options @samp{--orphan-handling} and @samp{--unique}
5640(@pxref{Options,,Command Line Options}) can be used to control which
5641output sections an orphan is placed in.
5642
41911f68 5643If an orphaned section's name is representable as a C identifier then
a61ca861 5644the linker will automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols:
9aec8434 5645__start_SECNAME and __stop_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the
41911f68
NC
5646section. These indicate the start address and end address of the
5647orphaned section respectively. Note: most section names are not
5648representable as C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.}
5649character.
5650
252b5132
RH
5651@node Location Counter
5652@subsection The Location Counter
5653@kindex .
5654@cindex dot
5655@cindex location counter
5656@cindex current output location
5657The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
5658current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
5659location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
5660within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
5661anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
5662
5663@cindex holes
5664Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
5665moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
dc0b6aa0
AM
5666location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
5667and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
5668doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
252b5132
RH
5669
5670@smallexample
5671SECTIONS
5672@{
5673 output :
5674 @{
5675 file1(.text)
5676 . = . + 1000;
5677 file2(.text)
5678 . += 1000;
5679 file3(.text)
563e308f 5680 @} = 0x12345678;
252b5132
RH
5681@}
5682@end smallexample
5683@noindent
5684In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
5685located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
5686followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
5687@file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
563e308f 5688@samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
252b5132
RH
5689specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
5690
5c6bbab8
NC
5691@cindex dot inside sections
5692Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
5693current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
69da35b5 5694statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
5c6bbab8
NC
5695absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
5696however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
5697not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
5698
5699@smallexample
5700SECTIONS
5701@{
5702 . = 0x100
5703 .text: @{
5704 *(.text)
5705 . = 0x200
5706 @}
5707 . = 0x500
5708 .data: @{
5709 *(.data)
5710 . += 0x600
5711 @}
5712@}
5713@end smallexample
5714
5715The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
5716and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
5717the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
5718much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
5719move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
5720and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
5721the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
5722the @samp{.data} output section itself.
5723
b5666f2f
AM
5724@cindex dot outside sections
5725Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
5726output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
5727needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
5728
5729@smallexample
5730SECTIONS
5731@{
5732 start_of_text = . ;
5733 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5734 end_of_text = . ;
5735
5736 start_of_data = . ;
5737 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5738 end_of_data = . ;
5739@}
5740@end smallexample
5741
5742If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
5743not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
5744between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
5745should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
5746blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
5747the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
5748sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
5749statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
5750special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
5751place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
5752as follows:
5753
5754@smallexample
5755SECTIONS
5756@{
5757 start_of_text = . ;
5758 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5759 end_of_text = . ;
5760
5761 start_of_data = . ;
5762 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
5763 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5764 end_of_data = . ;
5765@}
5766@end smallexample
5767
5768This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
5769@code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
5770placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
5771assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
5772a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
5773section. So you could write:
5774
5775@smallexample
5776SECTIONS
5777@{
5778 start_of_text = . ;
5779 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
5780 end_of_text = . ;
5781
5782 . = . ;
5783 start_of_data = . ;
5784 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
5785 end_of_data = . ;
5786@}
5787@end smallexample
5788
5789Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
5790@code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
5791
252b5132
RH
5792@need 2000
5793@node Operators
5794@subsection Operators
5795@cindex operators for arithmetic
5796@cindex arithmetic operators
5797@cindex precedence in expressions
5798The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
5799the standard bindings and precedence levels:
5800@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5801@ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5802@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5803@smallexample
5804precedence associativity Operators Notes
5805(highest)
58061 left ! - ~ (1)
58072 left * / %
58083 left + -
58094 left >> <<
58105 left == != > < <= >=
58116 left &
58127 left |
58138 left &&
58149 left ||
581510 right ? :
581611 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
5817(lowest)
5818@end smallexample
5819Notes:
a1ab1d2a 5820(1) Prefix operators
252b5132
RH
5821(2) @xref{Assignments}.
5822@c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
36f63dca 5823@end ifnottex
252b5132
RH
5824@tex
5825\vskip \baselineskip
5826%"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
5827\hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
5828\hrule
5829\halign
5830{\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
5831height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5832&Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
5833height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5834\noalign{\hrule}
5835height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
5836&highest&&&&&\cr
5837% '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
a1ab1d2a 5838&1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
252b5132
RH
5839&2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
5840&3&&left&&+ -&\cr
5841&4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
5842&5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
5843&6&&left&&\&&\cr
5844&7&&left&&|&\cr
5845&8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
5846&9&&left&&||&\cr
5847&10&&right&&? :&\cr
5848&11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
5849&lowest&&&&&\cr
5850height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
5851\hrule}
5852@end tex
5853@iftex
5854{
5855@obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
5856@dag@quad Prefix operators.
5857@ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
5858}
5859@end iftex
5860@c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5861
5862@node Evaluation
5863@subsection Evaluation
5864@cindex lazy evaluation
5865@cindex expression evaluation order
5866The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
5867an expression when absolutely necessary.
5868
5869The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
5870address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
5871regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
5872as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
5873
5874However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
5875until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
5876other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
5877for use in the symbol assignment expression.
5878
5879The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
5880assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
5881allocation.
5882
5883Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
5884@samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
5885
5886If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
5887available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
5888following
5889@smallexample
5890@group
5891SECTIONS
5892 @{
a1ab1d2a 5893 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
252b5132
RH
5894 @{ *(.text) @}
5895 @}
5896@end group
5897@end smallexample
5898@noindent
5899will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
5900address}.
5901
5902@node Expression Section
5903@subsection The Section of an Expression
5904@cindex expression sections
5905@cindex absolute expressions
5906@cindex relative expressions
5907@cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
5908@cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
5909@cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
7542af2a
AM
5910Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
5911relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
5912using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
5913value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
5914symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
5915operations.
5916
abf4be64
AM
5917Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
5918section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
5919address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
5920@code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
5921functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
01554a74
AM
5922One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
5923(@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
5c3049d2
AM
5924differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
5925versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
5926section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
5927Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
01554a74
AM
5928absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
5929given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
5930everywhere.
5c3049d2
AM
5931
5932In the following simple example,
252b5132 5933
7542af2a
AM
5934@smallexample
5935@group
5936SECTIONS
5937 @{
5938 . = 0x100;
5939 __executable_start = 0x100;
5940 .data :
5941 @{
5942 . = 0x10;
5943 __data_start = 0x10;
5944 *(.data)
5945 @}
5946 @dots{}
5947 @}
5948@end group
5949@end smallexample
252b5132 5950
7542af2a
AM
5951both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
5952address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
5953@code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
5954section in the second two assignments.
252b5132 5955
5c3049d2
AM
5956For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
5957addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
7542af2a
AM
5958
5959@itemize @bullet
5960@item
c05f749e
AM
5961Unary operations on an absolute address or number, and binary
5962operations on two absolute addresses or two numbers, or between one
5963absolute address and a number, apply the operator to the value(s).
5964@item
7542af2a
AM
5965Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
5966relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
5967and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
5968@item
c05f749e
AM
5969Other binary operations, that is, between two relative addresses not
5970in the same section, or between a relative address and an absolute
5971address, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute address
5972before applying the operator.
7542af2a
AM
5973@end itemize
5974
5975The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
5976
5977@itemize @bullet
5978@item
5979An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
5980@item
5981The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
5982@item
9bc8bb33 5983The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
11e7fd74 5984relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresses
9bc8bb33
AM
5985(after above conversions) is also a number.
5986@item
5987The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
5988relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
5989section as the relative operand(s).
7542af2a
AM
5990@item
5991The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
5992conversions) is an absolute address.
5993@end itemize
252b5132
RH
5994
5995You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
5996to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
5997create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
5998section @samp{.data}:
5999@smallexample
6000SECTIONS
6001 @{
6002 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
6003 @}
6004@end smallexample
6005@noindent
6006If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
6007@samp{.data} section.
6008
7542af2a
AM
6009Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
6010particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
6011
252b5132
RH
6012@node Builtin Functions
6013@subsection Builtin Functions
6014@cindex functions in expressions
6015The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
6016use in linker script expressions.
6017
6018@table @code
6019@item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6020@kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6021@cindex expression, absolute
6022Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
6023of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
6024value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
6025normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
6026
6027@item ADDR(@var{section})
6028@kindex ADDR(@var{section})
6029@cindex section address in expression
7542af2a 6030Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
252b5132 6031script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
7542af2a
AM
6032the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
6033@code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
6034@code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
6035the other two will be absolute:
252b5132
RH
6036@smallexample
6037@group
6038SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6039 .output1 :
a1ab1d2a 6040 @{
252b5132
RH
6041 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
6042 @dots{}
6043 @}
6044 .output :
6045 @{
6046 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
6047 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
6048 @}
6049@dots{} @}
6050@end group
6051@end smallexample
6052
876f4090
NS
6053@item ALIGN(@var{align})
6054@itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
6055@kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
6056@kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
252b5132
RH
6057@cindex round up location counter
6058@cindex align location counter
876f4090
NS
6059@cindex round up expression
6060@cindex align expression
6061Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
6062to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
6063doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
6064arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
6065expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
e0a3af22 6066equivalent to @code{ALIGN(ABSOLUTE(.), @var{align})}).
876f4090
NS
6067
6068Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
6069next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
6070variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
6071input sections:
252b5132
RH
6072@smallexample
6073@group
6074SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6075 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
6076 *(.data)
6077 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
6078 @}
6079@dots{} @}
6080@end group
6081@end smallexample
6082@noindent
6083The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
6084a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
6085a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
6086of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
6087
6088The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
6089
362c1d1a
NS
6090@item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6091@kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6092@cindex section alignment
6093Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6094been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6095evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6096the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
6097value in that section.
6098@smallexample
6099@group
6100SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6101 .output @{
6102 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
6103 @dots{}
6104 @}
6105@dots{} @}
6106@end group
6107@end smallexample
6108
252b5132
RH
6109@item BLOCK(@var{exp})
6110@kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
6111This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
6112scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
6113section.
6114
2d20f7bf
JJ
6115@item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6116@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6117This is equivalent to either
6118@smallexample
6119(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
6120@end smallexample
6121or
6122@smallexample
fe6052e1
AM
6123(ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize})
6124 + ((. + @var{commonpagesize} - 1) & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
2d20f7bf
JJ
6125@end smallexample
6126@noindent
6127depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
6128for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
6129@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
6130If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
6131memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
6132bytes in the on-disk file.
6133
6134This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
6135any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
6136@var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
6137be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for (while still
6138working on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}).
6139
6140@noindent
6141Example:
6142@smallexample
6143 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
6144@end smallexample
6145
6146@item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6147@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6148This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
6149evaluation purposes.
6150
6151@smallexample
6152 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
6153@end smallexample
6154
a4f5ad88
JJ
6155@item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6156@kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6157This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
eec2f3ed 6158@samp{-z relro} option is used.
a4f5ad88
JJ
6159When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
6160does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
6161@var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the most commonly used page
6162boundary for particular target. If present in the linker script,
6163it must always come in between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
eec2f3ed
AM
6164@code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}. Evaluates to the second argument plus any
6165padding needed at the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment due to
6166section alignment.
a4f5ad88
JJ
6167
6168@smallexample
6169 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
6170@end smallexample
6171
252b5132
RH
6172@item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6173@kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6174@cindex symbol defaults
6175Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
420e579c
HPN
6176defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
6177return 0. You can use this function to provide
252b5132
RH
6178default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
6179shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
6180the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
6181existed, its value is preserved:
6182
6183@smallexample
6184@group
6185SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6186 .text : @{
6187 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
6188 @dots{}
6189 @}
6190 @dots{}
6191@}
6192@end group
6193@end smallexample
6194
3ec57632
NC
6195@item LENGTH(@var{memory})
6196@kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
6197Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6198
252b5132
RH
6199@item LOADADDR(@var{section})
6200@kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
6201@cindex section load address in expression
7542af2a 6202Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
252b5132
RH
6203Section LMA}).
6204
2e53f7d6
NC
6205@item LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6206@kindex LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6207Return the binary logarithm of @var{exp} rounded towards infinity.
6208@code{LOG2CEIL(0)} returns 0.
6209
252b5132
RH
6210@kindex MAX
6211@item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6212Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6213
6214@kindex MIN
6215@item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6216Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6217
6218@item NEXT(@var{exp})
6219@kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
6220@cindex unallocated address, next
6221Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
6222This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
6223use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
6224output file, the two functions are equivalent.
6225
3ec57632
NC
6226@item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6227@kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6228Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6229
ba916c8a
MM
6230@item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6231@kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6232Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
c5da8c7d
NC
6233value has already been given for this segment (with a command-line
6234@samp{-T} option) then that value will be returned otherwise the value
6235will be @var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option
6236can only be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
7542af2a 6237``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
ba916c8a
MM
6238name.
6239
252b5132
RH
6240@item SIZEOF(@var{section})
6241@kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
6242@cindex section size
6243Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6244been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6245evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6246@code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
6247@smallexample
6248@group
6249SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6250 .output @{
6251 .start = . ;
6252 @dots{}
6253 .end = . ;
6254 @}
6255 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
6256 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
6257@dots{} @}
6258@end group
6259@end smallexample
6260
6261@item SIZEOF_HEADERS
6262@itemx sizeof_headers
6263@kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
6264@cindex header size
6265Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
6266information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
6267this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
6268choose, to facilitate paging.
6269
6270@cindex not enough room for program headers
6271@cindex program headers, not enough room
6272When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
6273@code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
6274number of program headers before it has determined all the section
6275addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
6276additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
6277room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
6278the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
6279script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
6280you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
6281command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
6282@end table
6283
6284@node Implicit Linker Scripts
6285@section Implicit Linker Scripts
6286@cindex implicit linker scripts
6287If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
6288an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
6289linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
6290linker will report an error.
6291
6292An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
6293
6294Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
6295assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
6296commands.
6297
6298Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
6299at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
6300read. This can affect archive searching.
6301
6302@ifset GENERIC
6303@node Machine Dependent
6304@chapter Machine Dependent Features
6305
6306@cindex machine dependencies
ff5dcc92
SC
6307@command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
6308sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
252b5132
RH
6309functionality are not listed.
6310
6311@menu
36f63dca
NC
6312@ifset H8300
6313* H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
6314@end ifset
6315@ifset I960
6316* i960:: @command{ld} and the Intel 960 family
6317@end ifset
7ca01ed9
NC
6318@ifset M68HC11
6319* M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6320@end ifset
36f63dca
NC
6321@ifset ARM
6322* ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
6323@end ifset
6324@ifset HPPA
6325* HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
6326@end ifset
7fb9f789
NC
6327@ifset M68K
6328* M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6329@end ifset
833794fc
MR
6330@ifset MIPS
6331* MIPS:: @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6332@end ifset
3c3bdf30 6333@ifset MMIX
36f63dca 6334* MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
3c3bdf30 6335@end ifset
2469cfa2 6336@ifset MSP430
36f63dca 6337* MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
2469cfa2 6338@end ifset
35c08157
KLC
6339@ifset NDS32
6340* NDS32:: @command{ld} and NDS32
6341@end ifset
78058a5e
SL
6342@ifset NIOSII
6343* Nios II:: @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6344@end ifset
2a60a7a8
AM
6345@ifset POWERPC
6346* PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6347@end ifset
6348@ifset POWERPC64
6349* PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6350@end ifset
49fa1e15
AM
6351@ifset SPU
6352* SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6353@end ifset
74459f0e 6354@ifset TICOFF
ff5dcc92 6355* TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
74459f0e 6356@end ifset
2ca22b03
NC
6357@ifset WIN32
6358* WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6359@end ifset
e0001a05
NC
6360@ifset XTENSA
6361* Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6362@end ifset
252b5132
RH
6363@end menu
6364@end ifset
6365
252b5132
RH
6366@ifset H8300
6367@ifclear GENERIC
6368@raisesections
6369@end ifclear
6370
6371@node H8/300
ff5dcc92 6372@section @command{ld} and the H8/300
252b5132
RH
6373
6374@cindex H8/300 support
ff5dcc92 6375For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
252b5132
RH
6376you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6377
6378@table @emph
6379@cindex relaxing on H8/300
6380@item relaxing address modes
ff5dcc92 6381@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
252b5132
RH
6382targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6383program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6384respectively.
6385
6386@cindex synthesizing on H8/300
6387@item synthesizing instructions
81f5558e 6388@c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really? -> mov.b only, at least on H8, H8H, H8S
ff5dcc92 6389@command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
252b5132
RH
6390sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6391page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
6392(That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
6393@samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
6394top page of memory).
1502569c 6395
81f5558e
NC
6396@command{ld} finds all @code{mov} instructions which use the register
6397indirect with 32-bit displacement addressing mode, but use a small
6398displacement inside 16-bit displacement range, and changes them to use
6399the 16-bit displacement form. (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b
6400@code{@@}@var{d}:32,ERx} into @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{d}:16,ERx}
6401whenever the displacement @var{d} is in the 16 bit signed integer
6402range. Only implemented in ELF-format ld).
6403
1502569c 6404@item bit manipulation instructions
c0065db7 6405@command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
1502569c 6406biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
c0065db7 6407which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
1502569c
NC
6408page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
6409(That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
c0065db7 6410@samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c
NC
6411the top page of memory).
6412
6413@item system control instructions
c0065db7
RM
6414@command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
641532 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
1502569c
NC
6416changes them to use 16 bit address form.
6417(That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
c0065db7 6418@samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
1502569c 6419the top page of memory).
252b5132
RH
6420@end table
6421
6422@ifclear GENERIC
6423@lowersections
6424@end ifclear
6425@end ifset
6426
36f63dca 6427@ifclear GENERIC
c2dcd04e 6428@ifset Renesas
36f63dca 6429@c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
c2dcd04e
NC
6430@c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
6431@node Renesas
6432@chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
36f63dca 6433
c2dcd04e
NC
6434@command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
6435H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
6436options are required for these chips.
36f63dca
NC
6437@end ifset
6438@end ifclear
6439
6440@ifset I960
6441@ifclear GENERIC
6442@raisesections
6443@end ifclear
6444
6445@node i960
6446@section @command{ld} and the Intel 960 Family
6447
6448@cindex i960 support
6449
6450You can use the @samp{-A@var{architecture}} command line option to
6451specify one of the two-letter names identifying members of the 960
6452family; the option specifies the desired output target, and warns of any
6453incompatible instructions in the input files. It also modifies the
6454linker's search strategy for archive libraries, to support the use of
6455libraries specific to each particular architecture, by including in the
6456search loop names suffixed with the string identifying the architecture.
6457
6458For example, if your @command{ld} command line included @w{@samp{-ACA}} as
6459well as @w{@samp{-ltry}}, the linker would look (in its built-in search
6460paths, and in any paths you specify with @samp{-L}) for a library with
6461the names
6462
6463@smallexample
6464@group
6465try
6466libtry.a
6467tryca
6468libtryca.a
6469@end group
6470@end smallexample
6471
6472@noindent
6473The first two possibilities would be considered in any event; the last
6474two are due to the use of @w{@samp{-ACA}}.
6475
6476You can meaningfully use @samp{-A} more than once on a command line, since
6477the 960 architecture family allows combination of target architectures; each
6478use will add another pair of name variants to search for when @w{@samp{-l}}
6479specifies a library.
6480
6481@cindex @option{--relax} on i960
6482@cindex relaxing on i960
6483@command{ld} supports the @samp{--relax} option for the i960 family. If
6484you specify @samp{--relax}, @command{ld} finds all @code{balx} and
6485@code{calx} instructions whose targets are within 24 bits, and turns
6486them into 24-bit program-counter relative @code{bal} and @code{cal}
6487instructions, respectively. @command{ld} also turns @code{cal}
6488instructions into @code{bal} instructions when it determines that the
6489target subroutine is a leaf routine (that is, the target subroutine does
6490not itself call any subroutines).
6491
6492@ifclear GENERIC
6493@lowersections
6494@end ifclear
6495@end ifset
6496
6497@ifset ARM
6498@ifclear GENERIC
6499@raisesections
6500@end ifclear
6501
93fd0973
SC
6502@ifset M68HC11
6503@ifclear GENERIC
6504@raisesections
6505@end ifclear
6506
6507@node M68HC11/68HC12
6508@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6509
6510@cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6511
6512@subsection Linker Relaxation
6513
6514For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6515optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6516
6517@table @emph
6518@cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6519@item relaxing address modes
6520@command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6521targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6522program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6523respectively.
6524
6525@command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6526transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6527page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6528
6529@item relaxing gcc instruction group
6530When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6531of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6532addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6533@code{bset} instructions.
6534
6535@end table
6536
6537@subsection Trampoline Generation
6538
6539@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6540@cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6541For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6542call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
c0065db7 6543will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
93fd0973
SC
6544trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6545case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6546point to the function trampoline.
6547
6548@ifclear GENERIC
6549@lowersections
6550@end ifclear
6551@end ifset
6552
36f63dca 6553@node ARM
3674e28a 6554@section @command{ld} and the ARM family
36f63dca
NC
6555
6556@cindex ARM interworking support
6557@kindex --support-old-code
6558For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
b45619c0 6559between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
36f63dca
NC
6560been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6561line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6562libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
6563option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command line switch should be
6564given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6565which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6566the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6567non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6568
6569@cindex thumb entry point
6570@cindex entry point, thumb
6571@kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6572The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6573@samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6574But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6575branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6576executing in Thumb mode straight away.
6577
ce11ba6c
KT
6578@cindex PE import table prefixing
6579@kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
6580The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
6581the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
11e7fd74 6582element prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
ce11ba6c
KT
6583import tables. By default this option is turned off.
6584
e489d0ae
PB
6585@cindex BE8
6586@kindex --be8
6587The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
080bb7bb
NC
6588executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian
6589objects - ie ones which have been assembled with the @option{-EB}
6590option. The resulting image will contain big-endian data and
6591little-endian code.
e489d0ae 6592
3674e28a
PB
6593@cindex TARGET1
6594@kindex --target1-rel
6595@kindex --target1-abs
6596The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6597@samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6598or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6599and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6600
6601@cindex TARGET2
6602@kindex --target2=@var{type}
6603The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6604@samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6605meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6606@table @samp
6607@item rel
eeac373a
PB
6608@samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6609@item abs
6610@samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
3674e28a
PB
6611@item got-rel
6612@samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6613@end table
6614
319850b4
JB
6615@cindex FIX_V4BX
6616@kindex --fix-v4bx
6617The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6618specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6619interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6620also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6621
6622In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6623linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6624@code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6625
6626In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6627relocations are ignored.
6628
845b51d6
PB
6629@cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6630@kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6631Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6632relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6633
6634@smallexample
6635TST rM, #1
6636MOVEQ PC, rM
6637BX Rn
6638@end smallexample
6639
6640This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6641and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
11e7fd74 6642condition flags, so may cause incorrect program behavior in rare cases.
845b51d6 6643
33bfe774
JB
6644@cindex USE_BLX
6645@kindex --use-blx
6646The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6647BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6648situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6649code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6650each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6651
6652This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6653specify it if you are using that target.
6654
c6dd86c6
JB
6655@cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6656@kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6657The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6658bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6659instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6660to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6661the support code can read the intended values.
6662
6663The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6664intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6665and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6666intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6667full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6668you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6669
6670If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6671enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6672@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6673mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6674vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6675@samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6676
6677If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6678potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6679such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6680first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6681instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6682the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6683are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6684
2de70689
MGD
6685@cindex ARM1176 erratum workaround
6686@kindex --fix-arm1176
6687@kindex --no-fix-arm1176
9d5777a3
RM
6688The @samp{--fix-arm1176} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum
6689in certain ARM1176 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you
6690are targeting ARM v6 (excluding ARM v6T2) or earlier. It can be disabled
2de70689
MGD
6691unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-arm1176}.
6692
9d5777a3 6693Further information is available in the ``ARM1176JZ-S and ARM1176JZF-S
11e7fd74 6694Programmer Advice Notice'' available on the ARM documentation website at:
2de70689
MGD
6695http://infocenter.arm.com/.
6696
a504d23a
LA
6697@cindex STM32L4xx erratum workaround
6698@kindex --fix-stm32l4xx-629360
6699
6700The @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360} switch enables a link-time
6701workaround for a bug in the bus matrix / memory controller for some of
6702the STM32 Cortex-M4 based products (STM32L4xx). When accessing
6703off-chip memory via the affected bus for bus reads of 9 words or more,
6704the bus can generate corrupt data and/or abort. These are only
6705core-initiated accesses (not DMA), and might affect any access:
6706integer loads such as LDM, POP and floating-point loads such as VLDM,
6707VPOP. Stores are not affected.
6708
6709The bug can be avoided by splitting memory accesses into the
6710necessary chunks to keep bus reads below 8 words.
6711
6712The workaround is not enabled by default, this is equivalent to use
6713@samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=none}. If you know you are using buggy
6714STM32L4xx hardware, you can enable the workaround by specifying the
6715linker option @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360}, or the equivalent
6716@samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=default}.
6717
6718If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6719potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6720such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists in a
6721replacement sequence emulating the behaviour of the original one and a
6722branch back to the subsequent instruction. The original instruction is
6723then replaced with a branch to the veneer.
6724
6725The workaround does not always preserve the memory access order for
6726the LDMDB instruction, when the instruction loads the PC.
6727
6728The workaround is not able to handle problematic instructions when
6729they are in the middle of an IT block, since a branch is not allowed
6730there. In that case, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
6731occurs.
6732
6733The workaround is not able to replace problematic instructions with a
6734PC-relative branch instruction if the @samp{.text} section is too
6735large. In that case, when the branch that replaces the original code
6736cannot be encoded, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
6737occurs.
6738
bf21ed78
MS
6739@cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
6740@kindex --no-enum-size-warning
726150b7 6741The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
bf21ed78
MS
6742warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6743enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6744linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
6745using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
6746not be diagnosed.
a9dc9481
JM
6747
6748@cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
6749@kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
6750The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
6751warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
6752@code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
6753linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
6754using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
bf21ed78 6755
726150b7
NC
6756@cindex PIC_VENEER
6757@kindex --pic-veneer
6758The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
6759ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
6760is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
6761@samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
6762
6763@cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
6764@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6765The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
6766code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
6767perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
6768placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
6769controlled by the command line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
6770The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
11e7fd74 6771duplicate stubs, increasing the code size. The linker will try to
726150b7
NC
6772group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
6773code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
6774where they should be placed.
6775
6776The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
6777@option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
07d72278 6778placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
726150b7
NC
6779branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
6780placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
6781value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
6782exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
6783A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
6784linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
6785from the input sections.
6786
6787The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
6788@samp{N = +1}.
6789
1a51c1a4
NC
6790Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
6791only, because it relies on object files properties not present
6792otherwise.
6793
1db37fe6
YG
6794@cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
6795@kindex --fix-cortex-a8
6796@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
6797The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
6798
6799The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
6800
68fcca92
JW
6801@cindex Cortex-A53 erratum 835769 workaround
6802@kindex --fix-cortex-a53-835769
6803@kindex --no-fix-cortex-a53-835769
6804The @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769} switch enables a link-time workaround for erratum 835769 present on certain early revisions of Cortex-A53 processors. The workaround is disabled by default. It can be enabled by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a53-835769}.
6805
6806Please contact ARM for further details.
6807
1db37fe6
YG
6808@kindex --merge-exidx-entries
6809@kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
6810@cindex Merging exidx entries
6811The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
6812
6813@kindex --long-plt
6814@cindex 32-bit PLT entries
6815The @samp{--long-plt} option enables the use of 16 byte PLT entries
6816which support up to 4Gb of code. The default is to use 12 byte PLT
6817entries which only support 512Mb of code.
6818
36f63dca
NC
6819@ifclear GENERIC
6820@lowersections
6821@end ifclear
6822@end ifset
6823
6824@ifset HPPA
6825@ifclear GENERIC
6826@raisesections
6827@end ifclear
6828
6829@node HPPA ELF32
6830@section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
6831@cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
6832@kindex --multi-subspace
6833When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
6834import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
6835The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
6836stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
6837multiple sub-spaces.
6838
6839@cindex HPPA stub grouping
6840@kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
6841Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
6842stub sections located between groups of input sections.
6843@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
6844sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
6845a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
6846the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
6847conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
6848prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
6849A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
6850branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
6851@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
6852@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
6853detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
6854positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
6855
6856Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
6857single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
6858create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
6859large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
6860
6861@ifclear GENERIC
6862@lowersections
6863@end ifclear
6864@end ifset
6865
7fb9f789
NC
6866@ifset M68K
6867@ifclear GENERIC
6868@raisesections
6869@end ifclear
6870
6871@node M68K
6872@section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6873
6874@cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
6875@kindex --got=@var{type}
6876The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
6877The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
6878@samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
6879the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
6880@samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
6881entries only at non-negative offsets.
6882@samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
6883entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
6884support such GOTs.
6885@samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
6886output file. All GOT references from a single input object
6887file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
6888files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
6889
6890@ifclear GENERIC
6891@lowersections
6892@end ifclear
6893@end ifset
6894
833794fc
MR
6895@ifset MIPS
6896@ifclear GENERIC
6897@raisesections
6898@end ifclear
6899
6900@node MIPS
6901@section @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6902
6903@cindex MIPS microMIPS instruction choice selection
6904@kindex --insn32
6905@kindex --no-insn32
6906The @samp{--insn32} and @samp{--no-insn32} options control the choice of
6907microMIPS instructions used in code generated by the linker, such as that
6908in the PLT or lazy binding stubs, or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is
6909used, then the linker only uses 32-bit instruction encodings. By default
6910or if @samp{--no-insn32} is used, all instruction encodings are used,
6911including 16-bit ones where possible.
6912
6913@ifclear GENERIC
6914@lowersections
6915@end ifclear
6916@end ifset
6917
36f63dca
NC
6918@ifset MMIX
6919@ifclear GENERIC
6920@raisesections
6921@end ifclear
6922
6923@node MMIX
6924@section @code{ld} and MMIX
6925For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
6926@code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
6927understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
6928can translate between the two formats.
6929
6930There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
6931Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
6932registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
6933equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
6934@samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
6935global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
6936this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
6937symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
6938
7a2de473
HPN
6939Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
6940@code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
6941The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
6942of a section.
36f63dca
NC
6943
6944Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
6945are left out from an mmo file.
6946
6947@ifclear GENERIC
6948@lowersections
6949@end ifclear
6950@end ifset
6951
6952@ifset MSP430
6953@ifclear GENERIC
6954@raisesections
6955@end ifclear
6956
6957@node MSP430
6958@section @code{ld} and MSP430
6959For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
6960will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
6961just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
6962
6963@cindex MSP430 extra sections
6964The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
6965
6966@table @code
6967@item @samp{.vectors}
6968Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
6969
6970@item @samp{.bootloader}
6971Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
6972in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6973
6974@item @samp{.infomem}
6975Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
6976this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
6977
c0065db7 6978@item @samp{.infomemnobits}
36f63dca
NC
6979This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
6980in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
6981
6982@item @samp{.noinit}
6983Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
6984
c0065db7 6985The last two sections are used by gcc.
36f63dca
NC
6986@end table
6987
6988@ifclear GENERIC
6989@lowersections
6990@end ifclear
6991@end ifset
6992
35c08157
KLC
6993@ifset NDS32
6994@ifclear GENERIC
6995@raisesections
6996@end ifclear
6997
6998@node NDS32
6999@section @code{ld} and NDS32
7000@kindex relaxing on NDS32
7001For NDS32, there are some options to select relaxation behavior. The linker
7002relaxes objects according to these options.
7003
7004@table @code
7005@item @samp{--m[no-]fp-as-gp}
7006Disable/enable fp-as-gp relaxation.
7007
7008@item @samp{--mexport-symbols=FILE}
7009Exporting symbols and their address into FILE as linker script.
7010
7011@item @samp{--m[no-]ex9}
7012Disable/enable link-time EX9 relaxation.
7013
7014@item @samp{--mexport-ex9=FILE}
7015Export the EX9 table after linking.
7016
7017@item @samp{--mimport-ex9=FILE}
7018Import the Ex9 table for EX9 relaxation.
7019
7020@item @samp{--mupdate-ex9}
7021Update the existing EX9 table.
7022
7023@item @samp{--mex9-limit=NUM}
7024Maximum number of entries in the ex9 table.
7025
7026@item @samp{--mex9-loop-aware}
7027Avoid generating the EX9 instruction inside the loop.
7028
7029@item @samp{--m[no-]ifc}
7030Disable/enable the link-time IFC optimization.
7031
7032@item @samp{--mifc-loop-aware}
7033Avoid generating the IFC instruction inside the loop.
7034@end table
7035
7036@ifclear GENERIC
7037@lowersections
7038@end ifclear
7039@end ifset
7040
78058a5e
SL
7041@ifset NIOSII
7042@ifclear GENERIC
7043@raisesections
7044@end ifclear
7045
7046@node Nios II
7047@section @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
7048@cindex Nios II call relaxation
7049@kindex --relax on Nios II
7050
7051Call and immediate jump instructions on Nios II processors are limited to
7052transferring control to addresses in the same 256MB memory segment,
7053which may result in @command{ld} giving
7054@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7055The command-line option @option{--relax} enables the generation of
7056trampolines that can access the entire 32-bit address space for calls
7057outside the normal @code{call} and @code{jmpi} address range. These
7058trampolines are inserted at section boundaries, so may not themselves
7059be reachable if an input section and its associated call trampolines are
7060larger than 256MB.
7061
7062The @option{--relax} option is enabled by default unless @option{-r}
7063is also specified. You can disable trampoline generation by using the
7064@option{--no-relax} linker option. You can also disable this optimization
7065locally by using the @samp{set .noat} directive in assembly-language
7066source files, as the linker-inserted trampolines use the @code{at}
7067register as a temporary.
7068
7069Note that the linker @option{--relax} option is independent of assembler
7070relaxation options, and that using the GNU assembler's @option{-relax-all}
7071option interferes with the linker's more selective call instruction relaxation.
7072
7073@ifclear GENERIC
7074@lowersections
7075@end ifclear
7076@end ifset
7077
2a60a7a8
AM
7078@ifset POWERPC
7079@ifclear GENERIC
7080@raisesections
7081@end ifclear
7082
7083@node PowerPC ELF32
7084@section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
7085@cindex PowerPC long branches
7086@kindex --relax on PowerPC
7087Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
7088displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
7089@samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7090@samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
7091the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
7092section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
c8a1f254
NS
7093section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
7094@samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
7095both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
7096considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
2a60a7a8
AM
7097
7098@cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
7099@table @option
7100@cindex PowerPC PLT
7101@kindex --bss-plt
7102@item --bss-plt
7103Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
7104generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
7105the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
7106writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
7107@command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
7108PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
7109compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
7110BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
7111
016687f8
AM
7112@kindex --secure-plt
7113@item --secure-plt
7114@command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
7115@samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
7116when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
7117layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
7118style BSS PLT.
7119
2a60a7a8
AM
7120@cindex PowerPC GOT
7121@kindex --sdata-got
7122@item --sdata-got
7123The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
7124sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
7125@code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
7126section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
7127@code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
7128@code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
7129@samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
7130@code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
7131PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
7132pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
7133GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
7134really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
7135
7136@cindex PowerPC stub symbols
7137@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7138@item --emit-stub-syms
7139This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7140symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7141
7142@cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
7143@kindex --no-tls-optimize
7144@item --no-tls-optimize
7145PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7146sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7147disable the optimization.
7148@end table
7149
7150@ifclear GENERIC
7151@lowersections
7152@end ifclear
7153@end ifset
7154
7155@ifset POWERPC64
7156@ifclear GENERIC
7157@raisesections
7158@end ifclear
7159
7160@node PowerPC64 ELF64
7161@section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
7162
7163@cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
7164@table @option
7165@cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
7166@kindex --stub-group-size
7167@item --stub-group-size
7168Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
7169by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7170@samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7171sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7172a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7173the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7174conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7175prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7176A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7177branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7178@samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7179@command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7180detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7181positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7182
7183Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7184single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7185create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7186large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7187
7188@cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
7189@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7190@item --emit-stub-syms
7191This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7192symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7193
7194@cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
7195@kindex --dotsyms
7196@kindex --no-dotsyms
95421fb9
AM
7197@item --dotsyms
7198@itemx --no-dotsyms
2a60a7a8
AM
7199These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
7200in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
7201function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
7202code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
7203properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
7204to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
7205@samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
7206dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
7207feature.
7208
7ae4ea7d
AM
7209@cindex PowerPC64 register save/restore functions
7210@kindex --save-restore-funcs
7211@kindex --no-save-restore-funcs
95421fb9
AM
7212@item --save-restore-funcs
7213@itemx --no-save-restore-funcs
7ae4ea7d
AM
7214These two options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} automatically
7215provides out-of-line register save and restore functions used by
7216@samp{-Os} code. The default is to provide any such referenced
7217function for a normal final link, and to not do so for a relocatable
7218link.
7219
2a60a7a8
AM
7220@cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
7221@kindex --no-tls-optimize
7222@item --no-tls-optimize
7223PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7224sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7225disable the optimization.
7226
7c9cf415
AM
7227@cindex PowerPC64 __tls_get_addr optimization
7228@kindex --tls-get-addr-optimize
7229@kindex --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
95421fb9
AM
7230@item --tls-get-addr-optimize
7231@itemx --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
7c9cf415
AM
7232These options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} uses a special
7233stub to call __tls_get_addr. PowerPC64 glibc 2.22 and later support
7234an optimization that allows the second and subsequent calls to
7235@code{__tls_get_addr} for a given symbol to be resolved by the special
7236stub without calling in to glibc. By default the linker enables this
7237option when glibc advertises the availability of __tls_get_addr_opt.
7238Forcing this option on when using an older glibc won't do much besides
7239slow down your applications, but may be useful if linking an
7240application against an older glibc with the expectation that it will
7241normally be used on systems having a newer glibc.
7242
2a60a7a8
AM
7243@cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
7244@kindex --no-opd-optimize
7245@item --no-opd-optimize
7246PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
7247corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
e7fc76dd 7248the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
2a60a7a8
AM
7249Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
7250
7251@cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
7252@kindex --non-overlapping-opd
7253@item --non-overlapping-opd
7254Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
7255@code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
7256the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
7257entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
7258
7259@cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
7260@kindex --no-toc-optimize
7261@item --no-toc-optimize
7262PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
7263entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
7264reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
7265marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
7266marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
7267relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
7268unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
7269reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
7270discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
7271reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
7272code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
7273optimization.
7274
7275@cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
7276@kindex --no-multi-toc
7277@item --no-multi-toc
794e51c0
AM
7278If given any toc option besides @code{-mcmodel=medium} or
7279@code{-mcmodel=large}, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model
7280where TOC
2a60a7a8
AM
7281entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
7282total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
7283grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
7284TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
7285calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
7286help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
728764K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
7288Use this option to turn off this feature.
794e51c0
AM
7289
7290@cindex PowerPC64 TOC sorting
7291@kindex --no-toc-sort
7292@item --no-toc-sort
7293By default, @command{ld} sorts TOC sections so that those whose file
7294happens to have a section called @code{.init} or @code{.fini} are
7295placed first, followed by TOC sections referenced by code generated
7296with PowerPC64 gcc's @code{-mcmodel=small}, and lastly TOC sections
7297referenced only by code generated with PowerPC64 gcc's
7298@code{-mcmodel=medium} or @code{-mcmodel=large} options. Doing this
7299results in better TOC grouping for multi-TOC. Use this option to turn
7300off this feature.
7301
7302@cindex PowerPC64 PLT stub alignment
7303@kindex --plt-align
7304@kindex --no-plt-align
7305@item --plt-align
7306@itemx --no-plt-align
7307Use these options to control whether individual PLT call stubs are
e05fa0ba
AM
7308padded so that they don't cross a 32-byte boundary, or to the
7309specified power of two boundary when using @code{--plt-align=}. Note
7310that this isn't alignment in the usual sense. By default PLT call
7311stubs are packed tightly.
794e51c0
AM
7312
7313@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub static chain
7314@kindex --plt-static-chain
7315@kindex --no-plt-static-chain
7316@item --plt-static-chain
7317@itemx --no-plt-static-chain
7318Use these options to control whether PLT call stubs load the static
7319chain pointer (r11). @code{ld} defaults to not loading the static
7320chain since there is never any need to do so on a PLT call.
7321
7322@cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub thread safety
7323@kindex --plt-thread-safe
7324@kindex --no-plt-thread-safe
7325@item --plt-thread-safe
7326@itemx --no-thread-safe
7327With power7's weakly ordered memory model, it is possible when using
7328lazy binding for ld.so to update a plt entry in one thread and have
7329another thread see the individual plt entry words update in the wrong
7330order, despite ld.so carefully writing in the correct order and using
7331memory write barriers. To avoid this we need some sort of read
7332barrier in the call stub, or use LD_BIND_NOW=1. By default, @code{ld}
7333looks for calls to commonly used functions that create threads, and if
7334seen, adds the necessary barriers. Use these options to change the
7335default behaviour.
2a60a7a8
AM
7336@end table
7337
7338@ifclear GENERIC
7339@lowersections
7340@end ifclear
7341@end ifset
7342
49fa1e15
AM
7343@ifset SPU
7344@ifclear GENERIC
7345@raisesections
7346@end ifclear
7347
7348@node SPU ELF
7349@section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
7350
7351@cindex SPU ELF options
7352@table @option
7353
7354@cindex SPU plugins
7355@kindex --plugin
7356@item --plugin
7357This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
7358
7359@cindex SPU overlays
7360@kindex --no-overlays
7361@item --no-overlays
7362Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
7363regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
7364@command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
7365turns off all this special overlay handling.
7366
7367@cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
7368@kindex --emit-stub-syms
7369@item --emit-stub-syms
7370This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
7371symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7372
7373@cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
7374@kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
7375@item --extra-overlay-stubs
7376This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
7377function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
7378on calls to non-overlay regions.
7379
7380@cindex SPU local store size
7381@kindex --local-store=lo:hi
7382@item --local-store=lo:hi
7383@command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
7384the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
7385range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
7386
c0065db7 7387@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
7388@kindex --stack-analysis
7389@item --stack-analysis
7390SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
7391unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
7392under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
7393@command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
7394@command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
7395determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
7396for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
7397for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
7398for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
7399find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
7400and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
7401under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
7402dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
7403is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
7404and calls will be given.
7405
c0065db7 7406@cindex SPU
49fa1e15
AM
7407@kindex --emit-stack-syms
7408@item --emit-stack-syms
7409This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
7410in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
7411These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
7412functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
7413functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
7414such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
7415The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
c0065db7 7416@code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
49fa1e15
AM
7417@end table
7418
7419@ifclear GENERIC
7420@lowersections
7421@end ifclear
7422@end ifset
7423
36f63dca
NC
7424@ifset TICOFF
7425@ifclear GENERIC
7426@raisesections
7427@end ifclear
7428
7429@node TI COFF
7430@section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
7431@cindex TI COFF versions
7432@kindex --format=@var{version}
7433The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
7434TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
7435also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
7436format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
7437header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
7438
7439@ifclear GENERIC
7440@lowersections
7441@end ifclear
7442@end ifset
7443
2ca22b03
NC
7444@ifset WIN32
7445@ifclear GENERIC
7446@raisesections
7447@end ifclear
7448
7449@node WIN32
7450@section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
7451
c0065db7 7452This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
b45619c0 7453See @ref{Options,,Command Line Options} for detailed description of the
dc8465bf 7454command line options mentioned here.
2ca22b03
NC
7455
7456@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
7457@cindex import libraries
7458@item import libraries
69da35b5 7459The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
2ca22b03 7460libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
69da35b5
NC
7461regular static archives and are handled as any other static
7462archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
2ca22b03
NC
7463support for creating such libraries provided with the
7464@samp{--out-implib} command line option.
7465
c0065db7
RM
7466@item exporting DLL symbols
7467@cindex exporting DLL symbols
dc8465bf
NC
7468The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
7469
7470@table @emph
7471@item using auto-export functionality
7472@cindex using auto-export functionality
7473By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
7474which is controlled by the following command line options:
7475
0a5d968e
NC
7476@itemize
7477@item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
7478@item --exclude-symbols
7479@item --exclude-libs
e1c37eb5 7480@item --exclude-modules-for-implib
09e2aba4 7481@item --version-script
0a5d968e
NC
7482@end itemize
7483
09e2aba4
DK
7484When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
7485(global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
7486symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
7487often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
7488private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
9d5777a3 7489options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
09e2aba4
DK
7490exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
7491final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
7492
7493If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
0a5d968e
NC
7494command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
7495if either of the following are true:
7496
7497@itemize
7498@item A DEF file is used.
7499@item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
7500@end itemize
dc8465bf 7501
c0065db7
RM
7502@item using a DEF file
7503@cindex using a DEF file
dc8465bf
NC
7504Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
7505an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
7506exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
7507name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
0a5d968e 7508command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
dc8465bf
NC
7509
7510@example
7511gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
7512@end example
7513
0a5d968e
NC
7514Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
7515@samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7516
dc8465bf
NC
7517Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
7518
7519@example
4b5bd4e7 7520LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
dc8465bf
NC
7521
7522EXPORTS
7523foo
7524bar
7525_bar = bar
4b5bd4e7
DS
7526another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
7527var1 DATA
7fcab871
KT
7528doo = foo == foo2
7529eoo DATA == var1
c0065db7 7530@end example
dc8465bf 7531
7fcab871 7532This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
4b5bd4e7
DS
7533symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
7534alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
7535by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
7536@code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7fcab871
KT
7537@code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
7538export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
7539in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
7540symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
4b5bd4e7 7541
6b31ad16
DS
7542The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
7543name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
7544the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
7545
b45619c0
NC
7546When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
7547library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
6b31ad16 7548@code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
c0065db7 7549executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
6b31ad16
DS
7550
7551With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
7552specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
c0065db7 7553non-default base address for the image.
6b31ad16
DS
7554
7555If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
a2877985
DS
7556or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
7557filename specified on the command line.
6b31ad16 7558
4b5bd4e7
DS
7559The complete specification of an export symbol is:
7560
7561@example
7562EXPORTS
7563 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
7564 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7fcab871 7565 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
c0065db7 7566@end example
4b5bd4e7
DS
7567
7568Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
7569@samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
7570@samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
7571@samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
7572Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7fcab871
KT
7573@samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
7574string in import/export table for the symbol.
4b5bd4e7
DS
7575
7576The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
7577
7578@code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
7579will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
7580by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
7581linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
7582library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
7583
7584@code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
7585The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
7586the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
7587@code{*_imp__foo}).
7588
7589@code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
7590well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
7591read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
7592variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
7593the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
7594extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
7595application will behave unexpectedly.
7596
7597@code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
7598it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
7599symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
7600API at runtime or by by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
7601the DLL without an import library.
c0065db7 7602
4b5bd4e7
DS
7603See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
7604other DEF file statements
dc8465bf
NC
7605
7606@cindex creating a DEF file
7607While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
7608with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command line option.
0a5d968e
NC
7609
7610@item Using decorations
7611@cindex Using decorations
7612Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
7613itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
7614declared as:
7615
7616@example
7617__declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
7618__declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
7619@end example
7620
7621All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
7622any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
7623this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
7624the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7625
7626Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
c0065db7 7627decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
0a5d968e
NC
7628instead:
7629
7630@example
7631__declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
7632__declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
7633@end example
7634
c0065db7
RM
7635This complicates the structure of library header files, because
7636when included by the library itself the header must declare the
0a5d968e
NC
7637variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
7638code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
c0065db7 7639of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
0a5d968e
NC
7640omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
7641@samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
b45619c0 7642information.
c0065db7 7643@end table
dc8465bf 7644
2ca22b03
NC
7645@cindex automatic data imports
7646@item automatic data imports
7647The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
69da35b5 7648by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
2ca22b03 7649compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
c0065db7 7650issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
69da35b5 7651code to these platforms, especially for large
2ca22b03 7652c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
c0065db7 7653initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
b45619c0 7654decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
c0065db7 7655platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
69da35b5
NC
7656command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
7657The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
7658suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
7659trigger the feature's use.
7660
c0065db7 7661auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
69da35b5
NC
7662additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
7663
c0065db7 7664"variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
69da35b5
NC
7665documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
7666
c0065db7
RM
7667The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
7668occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
7669One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
69da35b5
NC
7670below.
7671
7672@cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
c0065db7
RM
7673For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
7674object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
7675offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
7676field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
7677in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
69da35b5 7678without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
c0065db7 7679The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
69da35b5
NC
7680references.
7681
c0065db7
RM
7682The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
7683be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
7684themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
7685runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
7686compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
7687support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
69da35b5
NC
7688run without error on an older system.
7689
c0065db7
RM
7690@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
7691enabled as needed.
2ca22b03
NC
7692
7693@cindex direct linking to a dll
7694@item direct linking to a dll
7695The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
7696including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
69da35b5 7697libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
b45619c0 7698traditional import library method, especially when linking large
c0065db7
RM
7699libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
7700function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
7701though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
69da35b5 7702storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
c0065db7 7703tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
69da35b5
NC
7704large or complex libraries when using import libs.
7705
c0065db7 7706Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
69da35b5 7707@samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
c0065db7 7708of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
69da35b5
NC
7709perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
7710select the dll instead of an import library.
7711
2ca22b03 7712
69da35b5
NC
7713For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
7714to find, in the first directory of its search path,
2ca22b03
NC
7715
7716@example
45e948fe
NC
7717libxxx.dll.a
7718xxx.dll.a
7719libxxx.a
7720xxx.lib
69da35b5 7721cygxxx.dll (*)
45e948fe
NC
7722libxxx.dll
7723xxx.dll
2ca22b03
NC
7724@end example
7725
69da35b5
NC
7726before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
7727
c0065db7
RM
7728(*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
7729where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
7730@samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
7731file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
69da35b5
NC
7732@samp{cygxxx.dll}.
7733
c0065db7
RM
7734Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
7735@samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
69da35b5
NC
7736was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
7737various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
7738could coexist on the same machine.
7739
2ca22b03
NC
7740The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
7741applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
69da35b5 7742libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
2ca22b03
NC
7743
7744@example
7745bin/
7746 cygxxx.dll
7747lib/
7748 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
c0065db7 7749 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
2ca22b03
NC
7750@end example
7751
c0065db7
RM
7752Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
7753done two ways:
2ca22b03
NC
7754
77551. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
7756@example
7757gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
c0065db7 7758@end example
2ca22b03 7759
69da35b5
NC
7760However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
7761(@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
7762@samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
7763not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
7764
2ca22b03
NC
77652. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
7766directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
7767should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
7768making the app/dll.
7769
7770@example
7771ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
c0065db7 7772@end example
2ca22b03
NC
7773
7774Then you can link without any make environment changes.
7775
7776@example
7777gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
c0065db7 7778@end example
69da35b5
NC
7779
7780This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
7781perfectly legal
7782
7783@example
7784bin/
7785 cygxxx-5.dll
7786lib/
c0065db7 7787 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
69da35b5
NC
7788@end example
7789
dc8465bf 7790Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
69da35b5
NC
7791even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
7792@samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
7793
7794Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
45e948fe 7795wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
69da35b5
NC
7796
77971. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
7798work with auto-imported data.
7799
dc8465bf
NC
78002. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
7801import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
7802symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
7803for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
7804possible to do this without an import lib.
69da35b5 7805
45e948fe
NC
78063. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
7807critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
7808in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
7809stdcall-decorated assembly names.
7810
69da35b5 7811So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
c0065db7
RM
7812true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
7813a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
7814binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
69da35b5
NC
7815massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
7816requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
7817will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
dc8465bf 7818
c0065db7 7819@item symbol aliasing
dc8465bf 7820@table @emph
c0065db7
RM
7821@item adding additional names
7822Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
dc8465bf
NC
7823A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
7824exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
7825when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
c0065db7 7826import library. Consider the following DEF file:
dc8465bf 7827
c0065db7 7828@example
dc8465bf
NC
7829LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7830
7831EXPORTS
c0065db7 7832foo
dc8465bf 7833_foo = foo
c0065db7 7834@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7835
7836The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
7837
7838Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
7839source code using the "weak" attribute:
7840
c0065db7
RM
7841@example
7842void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
dc8465bf 7843void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
c0065db7 7844@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7845
7846See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
7847symbols.
7848
7849@item renaming symbols
7850Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
c0065db7 7851kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
dc8465bf
NC
7852@samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
7853DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
c0065db7 7854created). In the following example:
dc8465bf 7855
c0065db7 7856@example
dc8465bf
NC
7857LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
7858
7859EXPORTS
7860_foo = foo
c0065db7 7861@end example
dc8465bf
NC
7862
7863The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
7864@samp{_foo}.
c0065db7 7865@end table
dc8465bf 7866
0a5d968e 7867Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
c0065db7 7868unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command line option is used.
0a5d968e 7869If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
c0065db7
RM
7870@emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
7871that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
7872@samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
7873renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
7874to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
7875the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
7876In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
0a5d968e 7877which is probably not what you wanted.
c87db184
CF
7878
7879@cindex weak externals
7880@item weak externals
7881The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
7882weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
7883defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
7884are three variants of weak externals:
7885@itemize
7886@item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
7887called lazy externals.
7888@item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
7889This form is not presently implemented.
7890@item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
7891implemented.
7892@end itemize
7893As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
7894are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
7895uses a default value.
c1711530
DK
7896
7897@cindex aligned common symbols
7898@item aligned common symbols
7899As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
7900desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
7901the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
7902carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
7903by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
7904tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
7905but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
7906warnings about unknown linker directives.
5063daf7 7907
2ca22b03
NC
7908@end table
7909
7910@ifclear GENERIC
7911@lowersections
7912@end ifclear
7913@end ifset
7914
e0001a05
NC
7915@ifset XTENSA
7916@ifclear GENERIC
7917@raisesections
7918@end ifclear
7919
7920@node Xtensa
7921@section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
7922
7923@cindex Xtensa processors
7924The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
7925@code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
7926specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
7927keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
7928example, with the command:
7929
7930@smallexample
7931SECTIONS
7932@{
7933 .text : @{
7934 *(.literal .text)
7935 @}
7936@}
7937@end smallexample
7938
7939@noindent
7940@command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
7941and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
7942literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
7943interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
7944group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
7945files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
7946and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
e0001a05 7947
43cd72b9 7948@cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
e0001a05 7949@cindex relaxing on Xtensa
43cd72b9
BW
7950Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
7951provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
7952is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
7953literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
7954will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
7955location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
7956the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
7957unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
7958@code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
7959range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
7960
7961For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
7962to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
7963instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
7964instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
7965instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
7966@code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
7967hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
7968By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
7969switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
7970density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
7971instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
7972performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
7973linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
7974a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
7975
7976The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
7977control the linker:
7978
7979@cindex Xtensa options
7980@table @option
43cd72b9
BW
7981@item --size-opt
7982When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
7983more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
7984no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
7985alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
7986preserve the correctness of the code.
7987@end table
e0001a05
NC
7988
7989@ifclear GENERIC
7990@lowersections
7991@end ifclear
7992@end ifset
7993
252b5132
RH
7994@ifclear SingleFormat
7995@node BFD
7996@chapter BFD
7997
7998@cindex back end
7999@cindex object file management
8000@cindex object formats available
8001@kindex objdump -i
8002The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
8003These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
8004object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
8005format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
8006it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
8007associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
8008object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
8009(@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
8010list all the formats available for your configuration.
8011
8012@cindex BFD requirements
8013@cindex requirements for BFD
8014As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
8015several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
8016BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
8017formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
8018been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
8019BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
8020may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
8021
8022One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
8023mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
8024useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
8025conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
8026
8027@menu
8028* BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
8029@end menu
8030
8031@node BFD outline
36f63dca 8032@section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
252b5132
RH
8033@cindex opening object files
8034@include bfdsumm.texi
8035@end ifclear
8036
8037@node Reporting Bugs
8038@chapter Reporting Bugs
ff5dcc92
SC
8039@cindex bugs in @command{ld}
8040@cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
252b5132 8041
ff5dcc92 8042Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
252b5132
RH
8043
8044Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
8045it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
ff5dcc92 8046to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
252b5132 8047work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
ff5dcc92 8048@command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
8049
8050In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
8051information that enables us to fix the bug.
8052
8053@menu
8054* Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
8055* Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
8056@end menu
8057
8058@node Bug Criteria
36f63dca 8059@section Have You Found a Bug?
252b5132
RH
8060@cindex bug criteria
8061
8062If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
8063
8064@itemize @bullet
8065@cindex fatal signal
8066@cindex linker crash
8067@cindex crash of linker
8068@item
8069If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
ff5dcc92 8070@command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
252b5132
RH
8071
8072@cindex error on valid input
8073@item
ff5dcc92 8074If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
252b5132
RH
8075
8076@cindex invalid input
8077@item
ff5dcc92 8078If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
252b5132
RH
8079may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
8080object files are correct.
8081
8082@item
8083If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
ff5dcc92 8084improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
252b5132
RH
8085@end itemize
8086
8087@node Bug Reporting
36f63dca 8088@section How to Report Bugs
252b5132 8089@cindex bug reports
ff5dcc92 8090@cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
252b5132
RH
8091
8092A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
ff5dcc92 8093products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
252b5132
RH
8094recommend you contact that organization first.
8095
8096You can find contact information for many support companies and
8097individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
8098distribution.
8099
ad22bfe8 8100@ifset BUGURL
ff5dcc92 8101Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
ad22bfe8
JM
8102@value{BUGURL}.
8103@end ifset
252b5132
RH
8104
8105The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
8106@strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
8107fact or leave it out, state it!
8108
8109Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
8110problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
b553b183
NC
8111assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
8112matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
8113the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
8114location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
8115were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
8116into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
8117specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
c0065db7 8118and the most helpful.
b553b183
NC
8119
8120Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
8121the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
8122on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
252b5132
RH
8123
8124Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
36f63dca
NC
8125bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
8126respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
8127You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
252b5132
RH
8128
8129To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
8130
8131@itemize @bullet
8132@item
ff5dcc92 8133The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
252b5132
RH
8134the @samp{--version} argument.
8135
8136Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
ff5dcc92 8137the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
252b5132
RH
8138
8139@item
ff5dcc92 8140Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
252b5132
RH
8141patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
8142
8143@item
8144The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
8145version number.
8146
8147@item
ff5dcc92 8148What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
252b5132
RH
8149``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
8150
8151@item
8152The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
8153observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
8154list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
8155sufficient.
8156
8157If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
8158and then we might not encounter the bug.
8159
8160@item
8161A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
b553b183
NC
8162bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
8163provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
8164bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
8165state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
8166requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
8167we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
8168attachments are best.
252b5132
RH
8169
8170If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
8171@code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
8172object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
8173@code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
8174how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
8175
8176@item
8177A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
8178incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
8179
ff5dcc92 8180Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
252b5132
RH
8181will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
8182not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
8183a chance to make a mistake.
8184
8185Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
8186say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
b45619c0 8187copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
252b5132
RH
8188C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
8189and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
8190fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
8191you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
8192any conclusion from our observations.
8193
8194@item
ff5dcc92 8195If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
252b5132
RH
8196diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
8197@samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
ff5dcc92 8198If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
252b5132
RH
8199context, not by line number.
8200
8201The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
8202sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
8203@end itemize
8204
8205Here are some things that are not necessary:
8206
8207@itemize @bullet
8208@item
8209A description of the envelope of the bug.
8210
8211Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
8212which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
8213changes will not affect it.
8214
8215This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
8216will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
8217with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
8218We recommend that you save your time for something else.
8219
8220Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
8221of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
8222output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
8223less time, and so on.
8224
8225However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
8226report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
8227
8228@item
8229A patch for the bug.
8230
8231A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
8232the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
8233a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
8234to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
8235
ff5dcc92 8236Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
252b5132
RH
8237construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
8238through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
8239able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
8240fixed.
8241
8242And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
8243patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
8244help us to understand.
8245
8246@item
8247A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
8248
8249Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
8250things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
8251@end itemize
8252
8253@node MRI
8254@appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
8255@cindex MRI compatibility
ff5dcc92
SC
8256To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
8257linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
252b5132
RH
8258alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
8259described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
8260simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
ff5dcc92 8261@command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
252b5132
RH
8262linker commands; these commands are described here.
8263
8264In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
8265file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
8266features to make use of them.
8267
8268You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
8269@samp{-c} command-line option.
8270
8271Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
8272command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
8273blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
ff5dcc92 8274MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
8275issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
8276
8277Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
8278
8279You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
8280lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
8281The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
8282
8283@table @code
8284@cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
8285@item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
8286@itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 8287Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
252b5132
RH
8288the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
8289@code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
8290your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
8291script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
8292commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
8293input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
8294@code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
8295
8296@cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
8297@item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
8298Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
8299in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
8300
8301@var{in-secname} may be an integer.
8302
8303@cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
8304@item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
8305Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
8306@var{expression} should be a power of two.
8307
8308@cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
8309@item BASE @var{expression}
8310Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
8311absolute addresses) in the output file.
8312
8313@cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
8314@item CHIP @var{expression}
8315@itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
8316This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
8317
8318@cindex @code{END} (MRI)
8319@item END
8320This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
8321
8322@cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
8323@item FORMAT @var{output-format}
8324Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
a1ab1d2a 8325language, but restricted to one of these output formats:
252b5132
RH
8326
8327@enumerate
a1ab1d2a 8328@item
252b5132
RH
8329S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
8330
8331@item
8332IEEE, if @var{output-format} is @samp{IEEE}
8333
8334@item
8335COFF (the @samp{coff-m68k} variant in BFD), if @var{output-format} is
8336@samp{COFF}
8337@end enumerate
8338
8339@cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
8340@item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
8341Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
ff5dcc92 8342@command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
252b5132
RH
8343
8344The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
8345same line, with no change in its effect.
8346
8347@cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
8348@item LOAD @var{filename}
8349@itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
8350Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
ff5dcc92 8351same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
252b5132
RH
8352command line.
8353
8354@cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
8355@item NAME @var{output-name}
ff5dcc92 8356@var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
252b5132
RH
8357MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
8358option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
8359
8360@cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
8361@item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8362@itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
ff5dcc92 8363Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
252b5132
RH
8364order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
8365script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
8366sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
8367file, in the order specified.
8368
8369@cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
8370@item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
8371@itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
8372@itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
8373Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
8374@var{name} used in the linker input files.
8375
8376@cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
8377@item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
8378@itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
8379@itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
8380You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
8381specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
8382If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
8383@var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
8384@end table
8385
793c5807
NC
8386@node GNU Free Documentation License
8387@appendix GNU Free Documentation License
36f63dca 8388@include fdl.texi
704c465c 8389
370b66a1
CD
8390@node LD Index
8391@unnumbered LD Index
252b5132
RH
8392
8393@printindex cp
8394
8395@tex
7ca01ed9 8396% I think something like @@colophon should be in texinfo. In the
252b5132
RH
8397% meantime:
8398\long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
8399\centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
8400\centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
8401\centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
8402\centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
8403\centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
8404\centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
8405\centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
8406\page\colophon
7ca01ed9 8407% Blame: doc@@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
252b5132
RH
8408@end tex
8409
252b5132 8410@bye